MODEL EB6 GAS BURNER

CUSTOMER MILLTECH S.r.l.

CUSTOMER ORDER OFI / 2007 / 93 in date 01.03.2007

CUSTMER REF 06021

ICOTEC JOB 07054

INSTRUCTIONS HANDBOOK

ICOTEC S.r.l. - I - 20035 LISSONE (MI) - Via G. Matteotti, 61

Tel 039-2455837 - Fax 039-2455838 - www.icotecburners.com - e-mail: [email protected]
Cap. Soc. € 52.000,00 i.v. - R.E.A. 1505401 Milano - Reg. Imprese n. 772910/1996 - Milano - Cod. Fisc. E P. Iva 02604740965
 DECLARATION OF INCORPORATION

CUSTOMER = MillTech S.r.l.

CUSTOMER ORDER = OFI / 2007 / 93 del 01/03/2007
CUSTOMER REF. = 06021
ICOTEC JOB = 07054
INSTALLATION = EB-6

With the present, the company ICOTEC S.r.l.,

with head office in Via Giacomo Matteotti, 61 - Lissone - Italy, declare that:

the gas burners model EB-6, our job nr. 07054,

• destined to be included in an other plant,

• that they could not operate singularly,

are according to the code “EN 746-2 1998”

the electric control panel serial N° 2007271 wet side;

the electric control panel serial N° 2007272 dry side;
the burner control panel serial N° 2166220 wet side;
the burner control panel serial N° 2166210 dry side;
the terminal board serial N° 9554371 wet side;
the terminal board serial N° 9554371 dry side;
our job nr. 07054,

are according to the code “STN EN 60 204-1”

We moreover inform that:

• the burners could be commissioned only after that the technical file and the instructions
handbook of the machine have been provided.

Lissone, 05/12/2007
ICOTEC S.r.l.

GENERAL INDEX

Job 07054 ICOTEC S.r.l. Page 2 of 15

 1. WARNING Page 4
1.1 General Page 4
1.2 Copyright Page 4
1.3 Warranty Page 4
1.4 Responsibility Page 4
1.5 Storage Page 4
2. COMPOSITION Page 5
2.1 General information on the burner Page 5
2.2 Burner body Page 5
2.3 Combustion air and gas supply group Page 5
2.4 Combustion air and gas control system Page 5
2.5 Electric equipment Page 5
2.6 Terminology Page 5
3. TECHNICAL DATA Page 6
3.1 Fuel Page 6
3.2 Electric supply Page 6
3.3 Environmental conditions Page 6
3.4 Burners Page 6
3.5 Combustion air Page 6
3.6 Process Page 6
4. INSTALLATION Page 7
4.1 Unpacking Page 7
4.2 Mounting Page 7
4.3 Connection to the gas pipeline Page 7
4.4 Electrical connections Page 7
5. OPERATION Page 8
5.1 Burner operation Page 8
5.2 Preliminary operation before the start-up Page 8
5.3 First Start-up Page 8
5.4 Following starts Page 10
5.5 Stop operations Page 10
5.6 Operation rules Page 10
5.7 Settings Page 10
5.8 Adjusting Page 11
5.9 Commands and controls Page 12
5.10 Alarms and shut down. Trouble Shooting Page 12
6. MAINTENANCE Page 14
6.1 Safety warnings Page 14
6.2 Ordinary maintenance Page 14
6.3 Extraordinary maintenance Page 15
6.4 Dismantling and/or demolition Page 15
7. ANNEXED
7.1 Drawing no. 16.05.054 Burner P&I
7.2 Dwg no. 20.01.049 Gas valve train
7.3 Dwg no. 20.01.050 Gas valve train
7.4 Dwg no. 07.12.033 Burner
7.5 Dwg nr. 05.03.090-01 Electric wiring diagram
7.6 Dwg nr. 05.03.090-01 Electric wiring diagram
7.7 Bull EB6 Burner
7.8 Bull. Gas filter
7.9 Bull. Pilot gas solenoid valves
7.10 Bull. Main gas solenoid valves
7.11 Bull. Pilot gas pressure regulator
7.12 Bull Main gas pressure regulator
7.13 Bull. Gas and air pressure switches
7.14 Bull Motorized gas valve actuator
7.15 Bull Flame control panel
7.16 Bull UV flame detector
7.17 Bull High temperature limits
7.18 Bull Alarm panel
7.19 Bull Combustion air 3 ways solenoid valve
7.20 Bull. Gas valve proving system
7.21 Bull. Differential pressure transmitter

1) WARNINGS

1.1) General Warnings

Job 07054 ICOTEC S.r.l. Page 3 of 15

 • The handbook constitutes integral and essential part of the product and will be consigned to the
user. In case of equipment transfer, to make sure that this handbook must be delivered to the
new owner.
• Read with attention the instructions contained in the handbook, as they give important
information concerning safety, use and maintenance. Preserve the manual for each
subsequent consultation with care.
• The installation must be effected according to the codes, following the instructions of the
machine builder and from professionally qualified staff having technical competence in the
sector of application of the equipment. A wrong installation could cause damages to persons,
animals or things, for which the builder is not responsible.
• The start-up, the setting, the ordinary and extraordinary maintenance, must be effected only
from professionally qualified staff having technical specific competence.
• The procedures and/ or prescriptions contained in the present handbook, have to be added and
they don't exclude none of those referred to local, national and international codes relative to
the installation, use and maintenance of industrial combustion plants.
• All the dimensions, specifications, technical data and information present in this handbook are
the effective to the date of the issue. The manufacturer in order to improve the product, reserve
the right of modify or change all the necessary without obligation of information.

1.2) Copyright ICOTEC S.r.l.

All rights reserved. Any part of the present documentation couldn’t be copied and/or reproduced
with any system and/or transmitted to third party without a preventive written authorisation of
ICOTEC S.r.l.

1.3) Warranty
All the materials furnished from ICOTEC are warranted against all the defects of manufacture for a
period of 12 months from the date of the delivery. The guarantee provides for free substitution of
all those parts which results defective, delivered ex our works.
Contingent interventions of ICOTEC staff required for the substitution of the defective equipments,
will be arranged with our after sales service. In this case, you have to dismount and move carefully
the equipments in a place easy to be handled and the expenses of trip, food and accommodation
only will be at your charge.

The execution of interventions and/or operations expressly forbidden in this handbook, regulations,
dismantlement and/or other procedures not recommended or authorised in these instructions, will
render invalid the conditions of guarantee.

1.4) Responsibility
ICOTEC S.r.l. declines every possible liabilities for damage to people and goods caused by
incorrect installation, fuels and power supply not agree, use of the plant by partly or completely not
trained operators, use of the plant without observance of the local laws and/or regulations, non-
observance of the indications and prescriptions of this handbook, incorrectly performed
maintenance or performed by personnel without experience, use of replacements parts not
supplied by Icotec S.r.l., safety equipments or instruments settings tampering, natural calamities.

1.5) Storage
From the reception to the installation, the equipment must be stored into a dry protected from the
inclement water place.
Being the components delicate parts that form safety systems, the exposure to atmospheric
agents is not admitted even with suitable packing.

Job 07054 ICOTEC S.r.l. Page 4 of 15

2) COMPOSITION

2.1) General information on the burner

Each gas burner is essentially composed by:
• a burner body;
• a combustion air, gas and kerosene supply group;
• a combustion air, gas and kerosene control system;
• an electric equipment.

2.2) Burner body

The burner body includes the ignition and flame detecting devices, air and gas pressures
measuring taps for setting and flow control, the flame peepsight.

2.3) Combustion air, gas and kerosene supply group

The supply group includes:
• the low air pressure switches;
• the gas and kerosene valve trains constituted according to the codes, complete of safety, shut-
off and control equipment.

2.4) Combustion air, gas and kerosene control system

The combustion air, gas and kerosene control system includes:
• the butterfly valve for combustion air control;
• the gas control valve;
• the electric operator for the modulating control, connected with linkages to the air, gas and
kerosene control valves, driven by the temperature controller mounted on the machine control
panel.

2.5) Electric equipment

The electric equipment consists of a local control panel located near to the burner in which are
mounted and connected the flame programming relay and the necessary equipment for the
operation and the combustion system control.
On the burner is installed a terminal box with the ignition transformer complete with high tension
cable and connection for the spark igniter and a terminal strip wired to the electric burner
equipment.

2.6) Terminology
In the present handbook are used technical terms about the equipments that constitute the
combustion systems i.e.: pressure switches, solenoid valves, flame relays, etc.
Their position on the burner and/or on the plant and their function, is specified on the drawings
annexed to this handbook.

3) TECHNICAL DATA

3.1. Fuel gas

Type Natural gas
Specific weight 0,72 kg/Nm3
Job 07054 ICOTEC S.r.l. Page 5 of 15
 Low heating value 8.500 kcal/ Nm3
Required pressure to the supply limit 180-200 mbar
Temperature ambient °C
Execution according to code EN 746 - 2

3.2. Electric supply

3 Phase power 400 V
Mono phase power 230
Auxiliary circuit power 230/24 V
Frequency 50 Hz
Execution according to code EN 60 204-1
Min. electric protection IP 54

3.3. Environmental conditions

Height on sea level
Country of destination

3.4. Burners
Model EB-6
Max. working capacity 3.600 kW
Min. capacity (gas) 200 kW
Installed burners quantity
2

3.5. Combustion
Combustion air capacity at 20°C 4.150 Nm³/h
∆P combustion air at burner at 20°C 42 mbar
Exercise temperature 150 °C

3.6. Process
Yankee hood
Process flow // Nm³/h
Inlet temperature // °C
Outlet temperature // °C
Combustion chamber backpressure // mbar

Job 07054 ICOTEC S.r.l. Page 6 of 15

4) INSTALLATION

4.1) Unpacking
After removed all packing, assure of the integrity of the content and its correspondence to the
consignment documents. In case of failure or damage of any of the parts constituent the supply,
inform immediately the forwarder and ICOTEC.
The materials used for the packing must not be left on the territory because potential pollution
source, must be collected and placed in proper place following the local authority prescriptions.
4.2) Mounting
The burners can be installed on different machine/plants whose characteristics can be very
different among them.
Such characteristics, so as the operation conditions, are examined during project designing in
which are established the proper technical solution for the installation.
Therefore, the assembling must be performed following the drawings, the indications and the
procedure prescribed by the machine builder on which the burners have to be installed.
To make reference, also, to the burner assembly drawing annexed to this handbook.

IMPORTANT:

For installation details, see the attached instruction bulletin.

As example, point out the following procedure:

• install the burner body interposing the opportune gasket (if required);
• tighten adequately the bolts of the flanges;
• install the air, gas and kerosene supply groups;
• install, if foreseen, the electric panels in proper position for the designed functions, having care
to avoid positions in which the relative humidity is over 80% and the equipment is not subject to
continuous maximum vibrations over to 0,5G and temperatures over to 50°C;
• install the loose parts supplied with the burners such pressure switches and thermocouples,
following the drawings and the indications prescribed from the machine builder.

During the assembling it is essential to pay attention to avoid damage to the burner parts
and/or its components. This could compromise their operation and safety.
Don't use the gas train or the fan or the electric equipment for lifting, but the burner body
and/or the suitable pieces.

4.3) Connection to the gas supply pipeline

Connect the gas pipe to the cock located to the gas valve train inlet .
The supply pipeline must be such to assure the right gas flow as stated at the point 3.1 in the
technical data without pressure decreasing.
The supply pipeline must be built according to the local codes.
4.4) Electric connection
Connect the terminals located into the electrical box of the burners. Follow the electric drawings
and indications of the machine builder.

Job 07054 ICOTEC S.r.l. Page 7 of 15

5) OPERATION
5.1) Burner operation
The burner is nozzle mixing type. The combustion air blast from the fan, flows through the control
valve, enter the burner body and goes to the nozzle. The gas enters the burner body and mix in the
nozzle with the air producing the combustion ignited by the spark plug.
The thermal capacity is controlled acting on the air and gas regulating valves connected with
linkages system to the electric operator, driven by the signal coming from a temperature controller
located on the machine electric control panel.
For further information, see the annexed burner brochure.
5.2) Preliminary operations before the start-up
Before the start-up, switch on the power to the machine and to all burner control panels and verify
as follows:
• all the process and exhaust fans must be in operation and their rotation must be that indicated
on the labels;
• process and exhaust dampers or other air control devices must be in working position;
• fuel gas must be available to the gas valve train inlet to the required pressure;
• the dimension of the gas supply pipe must be adequate to the required flow as indicated in the
technical data;
• the gas supply pipe must be purged from the air up to the burner gas valve train inlet.

5.3) First start-up

The burners are shipped partially tested and adjusted. It is essential during their start-up, make the
correct adjusting and verify all the values with those indicated at chapter Settings.
Moreover follow all indications on annexed instructions bulletin.

5.3.1 After the preliminary operations above indicated:

1. set on the temperature controller a low value (25-30°C) or if available, select on the instrument
the manual function;
2. start the combustion air blower and verify the correct operation of the low combustion air
pressure switch.

5.3.2 If all the safety conditions have been satisfied, the first starting will be as follows:
1. Open the gas cock on the burner.
2. To press the pulsating START, if the verification of the safeties (you see page 4 of the electric
diagram enclosure) is positive, the equipment of tightness control valves effects the test:the
shut-off pilot gas solenoid valve is supplied for some second and then cutted-off, the tightness
control pressure switch verifies that the pressure in this moment doesn't rise. If it doesn't rise it
means that the main and pilot safety solenoid valves have no leakage. Safety pilot gas
solenoidvalve is supplied for some second and then cut-off, the tightness control pressure
switch verifies that the pressure in this moment doesn't fall down. If it doesn't fall down it
means that the main and pilot shut-off solenoid valves have no leakage. The equipment gives
the consent to the control of flame to continue.
3. the flame control unit verifies that the low fire micro installed in the gas and air valve drivemotor
and therefore the valves air and gas connected to it are in the minimum position, if not this will
be signalled on the display of the control flame unit and it will stay attended that these will be.
4. if the air and gas valves are to minimum the control flame supply the 3 way solenoid valve of
the combustion air pressure switch and verifies that the it feels the pressure. Then begins the
prepurge time, after that the control flame unit will check the following sequence: supply the
ignition transformer, then the pilot solenoid valves, it will verify the presence of flame after have
cutted-off the ignition transformer. After the time of pilot flame stabilization the main gas
solenoid valves will be supplied and then cutted-off the pilot solenoid valves. After the time of
stabilization of the main flame the control flame unit will give the consent to the temperature
modulation and if the hood is closed the burner will bring to the in requested temperaturere
5. Check across the peepsight if the burner ignites, if not, restore and try again.
6. If after some attempts the burner doesn't ignite, check the spark ignitor, that the gas arrives at
to the burner nozzle across all the equipments of the gas valve train and that these functions
correctly. Do check to the personal provost, if the gas pipeline have been bled adequately.
7. May be the pilot and minimum gas flame factory set are too small. If so, first increase the pilot
gas opening the pilot gas adjusting valve and loose the internal screw of some turns. Then to
adjust the low main flame, loose the screw of the gas control valve stem and with a screwdriver,

Job 07054 ICOTEC S.r.l. Page 8 of 15

 open slightly in order to increase the gas flow. Check also the first step of the second solenoid
valve on main gas line (see the annexed instructions)
8. After that the burner is been alight correctly, reduce the pilot gas and the low main gas until the
flame signal remains stable, then stop the burner and try several ignitions.
9. Increase the set-point on the temperature controller or manually open the valve in order to drive
the burner to the maximum capacity and check the gas and air pressure settings with a water
column gauge.
10. Adjust combustion air consequently to the required gas flow with about 20% of excess air.
Burner capacity is designed for the kerosene operation, but on gas operation the capacity is
lower, so combustion air on gas operation must be less then kerosene .
11. Maximum gas flow will be reached with completely open gas control valve adjusting the gas
pressure regulator.
12. Check the safety devices operating as follows, always with the burner on and with modulating
control, coming back to the previous conditions after the stop and restoring to restart the
burner.
• Check the low combustion air pressure switch increasing the set point and/or disconnecting
the 3 ways valve connector until to the burner lockout.
• Check the low gas pressure switch closing slowly the gas cock until to the burner lockout.
• Drive the burner to the max. capacity and check the high gas pressure switch decreasing
the set-point until to the burner lockout.
• Check the flame detection system detaching the UV scanner from its support until to burner
lockout.

5.4) Following Starts

The combustion plant must be managed as indicated on the instructions handbook of the machine
on which it is installed and the starting and stopping sequences must be according to the
applicable codes.
The usually operations to start-up the plant are:
1. Open the gas cock on the burner.
2. Open the manual valve located outside the building.
3. Start the machine as indicated by the manufacturer.
4. Start the burners.
5. During the normal operation, the burners will be controlled from the machine main control panel
if the selector on the local panel is on REMOTE position.

5.5) Stop operations

At the end of the normal operations, stop the burner as follow:
1. press the burner stop button; maintaining at least the exhaust blower in operation;
2. wait that the temperature inside the machine is below the value prescribed from the builder;
3. stop all the machine blower;
4. switch off the electric power;
5. close all the gas cocks.

5.6) Operation rules

• Before burners starting, always verify that any extraneous material or obstruction be removed
from the burners and their parts, that there is no evident defects on the safety equipments, that
are not extraneous people near around the installation and that all the stop controls and
emergency push buttons are properly operating.
• Follow the indications of the machine/plant builder about the use of protective clothes or
helmets, glasses, gloves, etc.
• Follow the indications of the machine/plant builder about the starting.
• Advise for possible breakdown or trouble and/or anomalous operations to the responsible and
to the maintenance service and, in case of shift work, also to whom takes over.

Job 07054 ICOTEC S.r.l. Page 9 of 15

5.7) Settings
After the commissioning, note the operation values of every single burner and record them in the
following table, in order to make them available for all the future checking and control and
maintenance interventions.

Indicating Setting Values

Specification Setting Operation

mbar mbar
Gas ∆P at minimum
Gas ∆P at maximum
Air ∆P at minimum
Air ∆P at maximum
Low gas pressure switch 100
High gas pressure switch 150
Tightness control pressure switch 80
Low process air pressure switch 8
Low combustion air pressure switch 25

5.8) Adjusting
If will be necessary to modify the setting, or after components replacements repeat it, the present
paragraph illustrates the adjustments to perform.
All measurements must be made in differential with combustion chamber.
5.8.1 Before performing any adjusting or substitution, always with burner off, take visual knowledge with
the air and gas control system and its operation, and proceed as follows:
1. note and mark the linkage components position on the operator and on the air and gas control
valves;
2. remove the electric operator cover and following the indications showed on the annexed
operator instruction sheet, make a bridge to drive toward the maximum opening;
3. at maximum opening position, note and mark the lever, joints and rod positions;
4. remove the bridge to return at ignition position.
5.8.2 Low air and gas flow adjusting:
1. connect a water columns manometer to the combustion air and gas measuring tap;
2. start the burner and maintain it to the minimum position setting a low value on the temperature
controller;
3. if the burner doesn't ignite because of the minimum is too low, increase the opening adjusting
the rod position on operator lever;
4. with burner on, adjust the air and gas valve openings until to desired values;
5. make several ignitions to verify the correct operation.
5.8.3 High air and gas flow adjusting:
1. drive the burner to maximum capacity and check air and gas pressures with those pointed out
in the above table;
2. adjust the air pressure (if needed) acting on the air valve lever, joint, rod;
3. adjust the gas pressure acting on the pressure regulator set in the gas valve train;
4. check at the maximum operator travel, that the gas control valve doesn't go over the maximum
opening; eventually stop the burner and to re-adjust the linkage, restart the burner and check
the correct opening;
5. drive to the low fire position (minimum capacity) and check again as indicated on point 5.8.2.

Job 07054 ICOTEC S.r.l. Page 10 of 15

5.9) Commands and controls
The present chapter describes the commands and the available controls for the combustion
system management.
All the commands and the signals are on the burner local control panel.
Alarms message are on the display located in front of the cabinet.

5.9.1 Burner local control panel

The panel inside is accessible only to the electricians when the electric power is switched off.
On the control panel door the following equipment are present.
1. Main switch.
2. LIMITS ON light
3. EMERGENCY stop mushroom push button.
4. LOCAL / REMOTE control selector switch.
5. START push button.
6. ALARM RESET push button: to restore the operating conditions after a safety lockout.

For further details, see the annexed electric drawings.

Job 07054 ICOTEC S.r.l. Page 11 of 15

5.10) Alarms and shut downs: Trouble shooting

Problem Points to check Remedies

5.10.1) Low Gas Pressure

a Gas failure, manometers 1 Gas cock closed 1 open
indicates no pressure
2 Gas failure in supply pipe 1 check the supply devices
(regulator, governor, shut-off valve)
b Small gas, shut-off occur 1 Clogged filter 1 Wash gas filter insert or replace it
during control valve opening (see annexed sheet)
2 Gas supply pipe or devices too 1 verify and if the case replace
small
c Pressure switch opens with 1 Pressure switch damaged 1 verify the electric connections
regular gas pressure
2 replace (see annexed sheet)

5.10.2) High Gas Pressure

a The operation is regular and 1 Pressure switch not properly 1 verify the adjusting
gas pressure is at the adjusted 2 verify the pressure switch operation
required values
b Pressure is over the 1 Gas pressure regulator not 1 verify the adjusting
required values properly adjusted
2 Gas pressure regulator damaged 1 check the diaphragm and if the
case replace them or the complete
regulator
c With burner off, pressure 1 Pressure switch damaged 1 verify the electric connections
switch do not close
2 replace (see annexed sheet)

5.10.3) Flame Off (Flame relay display)

a Burner off. Doesn’t start 1 At burner off, combustion air 1 check pressure switch
after various trials pressure sw. out of start position
b Lockout after combustion 1 Flame rod grounded or undesired 1 check flame rod position, insulators
air blower start light on the scanner efficiency or scanner operation
c Lockout during ignition 1 Sparking failure 1 check transformer, ignition elecrode
and electrical connections
2 No gas downstream solenoid 1 check solenoid valves and
valves electrical connections
3 Minimum burner capacity too low 1 check gas control valve opening
d Lockout after ignition 1 Minimum burner capacity too low 1 check gas control valve opening
e Burner goes off 1 Flame rod grounded or dirty, UV 1 clean flame rod or scanner
scanner out of operation
2 check flame rod connections and
insulators or UV scanner
2 Air and/or gas not adjusted 1 check burner adjusting pressures

Note: For further information on flame relay, see the annexed bulletin.

5.10.4) Preignition interlock input failure

(Flame relay display: Low fire start switch out of ignition position)
a Burner off. Doesn’t start 1 Electric operator not in ignition 1 check end switches and cams (see
after various trials position annexed sheet)
2 check the electric supply line and
connections

Job 07054 ICOTEC S.r.l. Page 12 of 15

5.10.5) Low Combustion Air Pressure (Flame relay display if installed)
a Burner off. Doesn’t start 1 Intervention of low pressure 1 check set-point
after various trials switch with blower on
2 Pressure switch damaged 1 check the electric connections
2 replace (see annexed sheet)
2 Pressure switch damaged 1 check the electric connections
2 replace (see annexed sheet)

5.10.6) High Temperature

a Burner off. Doesn’t start 1 Limit switch not adjusted 1 check the set-point
after various trials 2 check the instrument
2 Thermocouple open or 1 check the thermocouple
interrupted

1 Drive motor doesn’t close 1 check the drive motor signal

5.10.7) Low Process Air Pressure

a Burner off. Doesn’t start 1 Intervention of low pressure 1 check set-point
after various trials switch with blower on
2 Pressure switch damaged 1 check the electric connections
2 replace (see annexed sheet)
2 Pressure switch damaged 1 check the electric connections
2 replace (see annexed sheet)

5.10.8) Tightness control valve failure

a Negative test Tightness 1 Pressure switch damaged 1 verify the electric connections
valve 2 replace (see annexed sheet)
2 Thightness control valve does 1 check the electric connections
not work
2 replace (see annexed sheet)

Job 07054 ICOTEC S.r.l. Page 13 of 15

6) MAINTENANCE
6.1) Safety warnings
All the interventions of normal or extraordinary maintenance, as the settings and the controls
during the normal use, must be done from professionally qualified staff having adequate technical
competence and trained to these operations. They must have read and understood the content of
the present handbook particularly for the parts concerning to the safety, so that the interventions
have effected in the respect of the procedures commonly used for this type of installations.

With exception for the emergency interventions, all the operations must be effected with the
machine and the burners switched off, cold and electrically isolated.
Is absolutely important that nobody can interfere with the operations trying to put in operation the
machine and/or the burners without to advice the technical staff.

Therefore is essential put a warning notice on the gas cocks and control panels switches
or, however, take the measures of the case.

Inside the burner electric panels, also if these are switched off, there are parts
and wiring related to interconnections with other control panels and/or parts of
the installation that remain switched on.

6.2) Ordinary Maintenance

For guarantee a problems free and a regular burners working, the following operations will be
performed to regular intervals as below specified.

W: Each week
M: Each month
6M: Every 6 months
Y: Each year

Frequency
Operations Notes
W M 6M Y
Burner
X Ignition electrode cleaning and inspection See 6.2.1)
X Flame rod cleaning and inspection (if installed) See 6.2.1)
X Inspection of the burner internals See 6.2.2)
X UV scanner cleaning See 6.2.3)
X Check UV scanner operation (if installed) See annexed bull.
Gas train
X Check burner operating air and gas pressures See 5.7)
X Check safety devices operating See 5.3.2.7)
X Gas cartridge inspection and cleaning See 6.2.7)
X Check gas threads sealing See 6.2.8)
Miscellaneous
X Check the temperatures indicated on the controllers with
laboratory thermometers
X Check all safety devices operation See 5.3.2.7)

Job 07054 ICOTEC S.r.l. Page 14 of 15

6.2.1 Spark ignition inspection and cleaning (See also burner bullettin).
1. Disconnect the spark ignitor removing from the cables.
2. Remove the spark ignition.
3. Check the insulator that don't have cracks or fractures.
4. Check the electrode, clean with a metal brush and, if necessary, straighten the electrode with
caution to avoid breakage of the same.
5. If the insulator is brocken or damaged, it is necessary replace the complete element.
6. Insert again spark ignitor.
7. Tighten carefully the blocking nuts to avoid to damage the insulators.

6.2.2 UV flame detection scanner.

1. Detach the scanner body from its support.
2. Clean with a clean and slightly damp cloth. Don't use solvents or other aggressive liquids.
3. Reassemble the scanner on its support and tight the screws.
4. For further details, see the annexed additional bulletin.

6.2.5 Gas filter cartridge cleaning.

1. Loose and remove the gas filter cover screw.
2. Remove the filter cartridge and wash it with tepid water and soap.
3. Leave to dry and reassemble.
4. Check the cover tight using water with soap.
5. For further information, make reference to the additional sheet (if foresees in this handbook).

6.2.6 Gas threads tight checking.

1. Use water with soap or specific spray on all the pipes and fittings threads to check if little bubbles
appear.

6.3) Extraordinary maintenance

For the extraordinary maintenance interventions that require the equipment replacement, follow to
how much specified in this handbook and in the additional annexed sheets and/or furnished
together with the spare equipment.
Changes to the plant that had to involve the move of one or more burners, must be perform
according to the instructions of the machine/plant builder.
The starting after these interventions must be performs according to the formalities relatively
described in precedence to the first one put in operation.

6.4) Dismantling and/or demolition

In case of dismantling and/or demolition, follow all the indications of the machine/plant builder, to
effect all the precautions for the dismantling foreseen in the maintenance chapter, besides
disconnecting the power supply to all electric panels and to remove gas from the supply pipeline.
To make sure that during the dismantling, there is no presence of harmful substances in any way
to the employed personnel and the environment.
If necessary, to divide the various parts of the unit so that to be able to digest them according to
the local laws and regulations.

Job 07054 ICOTEC S.r.l. Page 15 of 15

 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

A
SCHEMA ELETTRICO QUADRO BRUCIATORE LATO UMIDO A

B +197MH01 - G1 B

C
ELECTRIC WIRING BURNER CONTROL PANEL WET SIDE C
NOTE TERMOCOPPIE - THERMOCOUPLE NOTES

MODELLO BRUCIATORE Modello Natura del cond. Colori conduttori Guaina Norme
BURNER TYPE EB 6 Type Wires mat. Wires colors Sheath Codes
D D
_ _
+ +
QUANTITA' BRUCIATORI
E E
BURNERS NUMBER Fe Cost Rosso Blu Blu DIN
J
F e Cost Red Blue Blue DIN
F F
ALIMENTAZIONE
SUPPLY 400V - 50Hz + PE [600VA]
Fe Cost Bianco Rosso Nero ANSI
G J G
F e Cost White Red Black ANSI
AUSILIARI
AUXILIARY 230/24VAC - 50Hz + PE
H ATTENZIONE H
Collegare le termocoppie con cavo compensato direttamente
allo strumento in condotto separato dai cavi di potenza ed ausiliari
POTENZA MOTORI
I MOTORS POWER che possono indurre disturbi. I
CAUTION
Connect the thermocouple with compensation cable straight
the instrument in a tube separate from power and control cables
J in order to avoid interference problems. J

K K

L 1 17/04/2007 MODIFICHE AP FD L

0 07/03/2007 EMISSIONE AP FD

M REV. DATA DESCRIZIONE Dis. Contr. M

REV. DATE DESCRIPTION Drw. By Ckd. By

,&27(&6UO
E' vietata la cessione a terzi e la riproduzione
anche parziale del presente disegno. TITOLO QUADRO COMANDO BRUCIATORI COMMESSA DATA PAG.N.
La società proprietaria tutela i propri diritti a
rigore di legge. 07054S-01.prg 17/04/2007 1







It is not allow the transfer of the ownership to

third parties and the total or partial reproduction DESCRIZIONE COPERTINA DIS.Nr REV. di N.
LISSONE (MI) ITALY of this drawing. The owner firm defend theirs
rights following rules in force. 05.03.090-01 1 11
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

A A
F2

F3
B B
2F2
2A

C C

2.9

2.2
D D

E C1 E
2.5mmq
C 400V
2.5mmq
2T1
F 200/400VA F
1 3 5 24V 230V

2Q1

2.1

2.3
2 4 6
G 2F1 2F3 G

H H

024

230
0
C C2
2.5mmq 1.5mmq
I R T I
XC/ N

XC/ R

XC/ S

XC/ T

J 4/A1 J
3/K1

3/A1
2A1
K K

ALIMENTAZIONE ALIMENTAZIONE
400V-50Hz AUSILIARI
L DA CLIENTE AUX. SUPPLY L
600VA

M M

,&27(&6UO
E' vietata la cessione a terzi e la riproduzione
anche parziale del presente disegno. TITOLO QUADRO COMANDO BRUCIATORI COMMESSA DATA PAG.N.
La società proprietaria tutela i propri diritti a
rigore di legge. 07054S-01.prg 17/04/2007 2



















It is not allow the transfer of the ownership to

third parties and the total or partial reproduction DESCRIZIONE ALIMENTAZIONE AUSILIARI DIS.Nr REV. di N.
LISSONE (MI) ITALY of this drawing. The owner firm defend theirs
rights following rules in force. 05.03.090-01 1 11
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

2/K20
024 24
A A

XC/ 60
CHIUSO=REMOTO
APERTO=LOCALE

3.11
close=rem
open=loc
L R
B 3S1 3K2 3K3 B
3S3 197HA01-S5
3/J10 3/J14
3S3
EMERGENZA REMOTO LOCALE
REMOTE LOCAL 9/F6 3.5
EMERGENCY

3.12
3.4
C C

XC/ 61
3.2
3P3

3.1
3P2

D MARCIA ARRESTO D

3.6
START STOP
XC/ 3

XC/ 5

XC/ 7

XC/ 1
E E
3S2
3P1 3P4 3P5 3P6

F F
XC/ 4

XC/ 6

XC/ 8

XC/ 2
EMERGENZA MARCIA ARRESTO RESET
CLIENTE 24 CLIENTE 3.3 CLIENTE CLIENTE

3.7
CUSTOMER START STOP RESET
EMERGENCY

3.8
G G
197HA01-K1 197HA01-K2 197HA01-K6

H H

I I
T31
3K2 3K3 3K1 A1
A1 A1 A1

A2
J J
A2 A2 A2

2/J20
0 4/K1

3/B14 5/B19
3/B16 8/C9
K 4/H19 6/H14 K
4/C2
8/A20
9/D7

L MARCIA ARRESTO RESET ALLARMI L

IMPIANTO IMPIANTO ALARMS RESET
START STOP

M M

,&27(&6UO
E' vietata la cessione a terzi e la riproduzione
anche parziale del presente disegno. TITOLO QUADRO COMANDO BRUCIATORI COMMESSA DATA PAG.N.
La società proprietaria tutela i propri diritti a
rigore di legge. 07054S-01.prg 17/04/2007 3
*

*
!

"#

$%

&

'

()

,#

$%

.!

It is not allow the transfer of the ownership to

third parties and the total or partial reproduction DESCRIZIONE AUSILIARI DIS.Nr REV. di N.
LISSONE (MI) ITALY of this drawing. The owner firm defend theirs
rights following rules in force. 05.03.090-01 1 11
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

2/J20
230
A 24 4.15 A
3/A20
XB/1
4B1 4B3

4F4 4F5 P P
B 6Agl 500mA B

PDSAL107 PDSAH105
4.1

3K3

4.16
C C

4.10

4.11

4.17
4.4
3/J14

XB/ 2

XB/ 3

XB/ 4

XB/ 5

XB/ 6
4.2

4.5
D D

XC/ 25
A21

XC/ 9

XB/ 6
197HM23-PDS1
197HA01-K3
7 9 8

E ERO - LDS 4B4 E

CV
P P
6 10 2 3

PDSAL104
F -- F

+
PRESS.MINIMA

XC/ 10

XC/ 11

XC/ 26

XB/ 7

XB/ 8
ARIA ESTRAZ.
E CONT.VENT.

4.18

4.19
DA CLIENTE
4.13
LOW AIR,
G CONTACT G
EXHAUST

XC/ 27
197HA01-K4 8K19
8/J8
4.3

TC "J" CV
4.20
H H
3K2 4K11
3/J10 4/J19
197HM01/B-TE1

XC/ 28
N.B. 4.21 6/A1
I I
LEGGERE LE NOTE

4.14
4.12
A PAGINA 1
4K4 4K6 4K7 4K8 4K9 4K10 4K11
A1 READ NOTE A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1
ON PAGE 1 4H1
3/C9
J J
A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2

3/K20
0 5/K1

8/A2 8/A3 8/A4 8/A5 8/A7 8/A8 4/H20

K K

ALLARME MASS.TEMP. ALLARME ALLARME

ALLARME CONT. PRESS.MIN.GAS
HIGH TEMPERATURE ALARM ARIA PROCES. VENTILATORI LOW GAS PRESS.
LOW PROCESS AIR BLOWERS CONTACT
L ALARM L
PRESSURE ALARM ALARM

LIMITE
MASSIMA TEMP. ALLARME ALLARME CONSENSI LIMITI
HIGH TEMPERATURE ARIA ESTRAZ. PRESS.MAX GAS REGOLARI CHIUSI
M LIMIT EXHAUST AIR HIGH GAS LIMITS ON LIMITS CLOSED M
ALARM PRESSURE ALARM

,&27(&6UO
E' vietata la cessione a terzi e la riproduzione
anche parziale del presente disegno. TITOLO QUADRO COMANDO BRUCIATORI COMMESSA DATA PAG.N.
La società proprietaria tutela i propri diritti a
rigore di legge. 07054S-01.prg 17/04/2007 4
:

:
01

23

45

07

89

<3

45

>1

It is not allow the transfer of the ownership to

third parties and the total or partial reproduction DESCRIZIONE CATENA SICUREZZE BRUCIATORE DIS.Nr REV. di N.
LISSONE (MI) ITALY of this drawing. The owner firm defend theirs
rights following rules in force. 05.03.090-01 1 11
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
4/A20
230 6/A1
5/K1
0 5/K20
A A
REM.KEYBOARD
DYSPLAY S7800
PRESS. 3 5

XB/ 0
ARIA
COMB.
B MICRO LOW COMBUSTION 5.8 B

5.12

5.14
7/D1
BASSO AIR PRESSURE EV108
FUOCO SWITCH
LOW FIRE E.VALV 5B7 5K15 3K1
PAC TEST
MICRO SWITCH PDSAL106 5/K7 3/J17
P.A.C.
C COMBUSTION AIR C
PRESS. SW. 5.23
SOL. VALVE TEST

5.15
5.10
5.6
D D

XB/ 10

XB/ 26
XB/ 9
5.18 6/D1
5A4

E E
13 4 17 18 19 7 16 20 5 6

EC 7850 (220Vac)
F F
14 3 N 22 F G 10 9 8

5.7
G G
5.3

5.5
230V

5.11

5.13

5.17

5.19
5.9
5T1
XC/ 13

10VA
H 6/C1 H
120V

XB/ 12

XB/ 13
CONSENSO CAVO
XB/ 25

XB/ 11
MODULAZIONE 4x1.5mmq SCH

XB/ 14

XB/ 15
5.22

5.21
DA CLIENTE LUNGH. 20mt
MODULATION ON
I I
197HA01-K5

B/ 14
W W B Y
XC/ 14

5T2 5B5 5B6

5A5
5.4

J J
CELL UV C 7061 A
5K14 5K15 15BF 5K16

B/ 0

XB/ 0

XB/ 0
A1 A1 A1

K K
A2 A2 A2 6/K1
0 XB/ 0
4/K20 6/K1
MV103
7/D6 5/B18 EV.BLOCCO 9/D8
L 7/D8 8/A9 BRUCIAT. L
9/D10 GAS SHUT-OFF
E11 SOLENOID VALVE
E12 MV102
CONSENSO BLOCCO TRASFORMATORE EV.SICUREZZA BRUCIATORE
M MODULAZIONE CONTROLLO FIAMMA ACCENSIONE BRUCIAT. ACCESO M
MODULATION ON BURNER FLAME-OFF IGNITION GAS SAFETY BURNER ON
TRANSFORMER SOLENOID VALVE

,&27(&6UO
E' vietata la cessione a terzi e la riproduzione
anche parziale del presente disegno. TITOLO QUADRO COMANDO BRUCIATORI COMMESSA DATA PAG.N.
La società proprietaria tutela i propri diritti a
rigore di legge. 07054S-01.prg 17/04/2007 5
J

J
@A

BC

DE

@G

HI

LC

DE

NA

It is not allow the transfer of the ownership to

third parties and the total or partial reproduction DESCRIZIONE CONTROLLO DI FIAMMA DIS.Nr REV. di N.
LISSONE (MI) ITALY of this drawing. The owner firm defend theirs
rights following rules in force. 05.03.090-01 1 11
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
5/A20
230 7/A1

4/I20
4.21
A A

XB/ 18
B PRESSOSTATO B
CONTROLLO TENUTA
5/I20
5.19
PRESSOSTAT
6B9 PROVING SYSTEM

C P PDSAL109 C

5.18

6.3
5/D20

XB/ 19
D D

6A6
E E

12 14 7 15 3 10 9 1

F A4021A (220Vac) F

4 5 6 16 8 2 11

G G

6.4
6.1

6.2
3K1
H 3/J17
H

6.5
I I

XB/ 16

XB/ 17
6B7 6B8

J J
6K17
A1
XB/ 0

XB/ 0
A2
K 0 K
5/K20 7/K1

8/A10

MV100 MV101
L EV.SICUREZZA EV.BLOCCO L
PILOTA PILOTA
CONTROLLO (VEDERE (VEDERE BLOCCO
TENUTA VALVOLE DIS.MECCANICO) DIS.MECCANICO) CONTROLLO
GAS VALVE PILOT SAFETY PILOT SHUT-OFF TENUTA VALVOLE
PROVING SYSTEM SOLENOID VALVE SOLENOID VALVE FAULT GAS VALVE
M PROV. SYSTEM M

,&27(&6UO
E' vietata la cessione a terzi e la riproduzione
anche parziale del presente disegno. TITOLO QUADRO COMANDO BRUCIATORI COMMESSA DATA PAG.N.
La società proprietaria tutela i propri diritti a
rigore di legge. 07054S-01.prg 17/04/2007 6
Z

Z
PQ

RS

TU

PW

XY

\S

TU

^Q

It is not allow the transfer of the ownership to

third parties and the total or partial reproduction DESCRIZIONE CONTROLLO TENUTA VALVOLE DIS.Nr REV. di N.
LISSONE (MI) ITALY of this drawing. The owner firm defend theirs
rights following rules in force. 05.03.090-01 1 11
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

A A
197HM15HCV1

COMANDO 4 : 20mA
230 DA SALA QUADRI
B 6/A20 4 : 20mA SIGNAL B
FROM CUSTOMER

+ -
C C

XC/ S C H
XC/ 15

XC/ 16
7.1

7.3
D D
5K14 5K14
5/K5 5/K5

5/D9
5.6
E E

XB/ S C H
B/ 20 XB/ 20

B/ 21 XB/ 21

B/ 23 XB/ 23

B/ 24 XB/ 24
7.2

7.4
F F

7A7

BLUE RED + -
G 220V G

LOW FIRE
MICRO T1 T2
SWITCH 24V
H H
M7284C1000

197HM15HCV1
I I

J J
B/ 0

6/K20
0
K 0 K
6/K20 8/K1

L L

SERVOMOTORE
REGOLAZIONE FIAMMA
M SERVOMOTOR M

,&27(&6UO
E' vietata la cessione a terzi e la riproduzione
anche parziale del presente disegno. TITOLO QUADRO COMANDO BRUCIATORI COMMESSA DATA PAG.N.
La società proprietaria tutela i propri diritti a
rigore di legge. 07054S-01.prg 17/04/2007 7
j

j
`a

bc

de

`g

hi

lc

de

na

It is not allow the transfer of the ownership to

third parties and the total or partial reproduction DESCRIZIONE SERVOMOTORE DIS.Nr REV. di N.
LISSONE (MI) ITALY of this drawing. The owner firm defend theirs
rights following rules in force. 05.03.090-01 1 11
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

8.1
A A

4K4 4K6 4K7 4K8 4K9 4K10 5K15 6K17 3K1

4/J2 4/J11 4/J13 4/J14 4/J16 4/J17 5/K7 6/J16 3/J17

B B

8.9

8.10

8.11
8.2

8.3

8.4

8.5

8.6

8.7
T31
C 3/I19 C

8.12
8A8
D D

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

T MAX ALL.PAP ALLPAE ALL.VENT. PGMAX PGMIN ALL.C.F. ALL.C.T. SPARE SPARE SPARE SPARE SPARE SPARE RESET ACK
E TMAX RESET E

F F

ICD 15-R
G G

H H
19 20 17 18

I I
8.8

J 8K19 J
A1

24 HC2-24Vdc
4/A5 A2
K OMRON K
7/K20
0 8.1

4/G19
9/D12
ATTENZIONE
L INGUAINARE I CAVI DI SEGNALE DOPO L
AVERLI TWISTATI IN MODO DA SEPARARLI
DA OGNI ALTRO CAVO DI POTENZA CHE VA A FRONTE QUADRO
USE CABLE LAIED IN A TUBE SEPARATE
FROM POWER CABLE
M IN ORDER TO AVOID INTERFERENCE PROBLEMS
ALLARME M
ALARM

,&27(&6UO
E' vietata la cessione a terzi e la riproduzione
anche parziale del presente disegno. TITOLO QUADRO COMANDO BRUCIATORI COMMESSA DATA PAG.N.
La società proprietaria tutela i propri diritti a
rigore di legge. 07054S-01.prg 17/04/2007 8
z

z
pq

rs

tu

pw

xy

|s

tu

~q

It is not allow the transfer of the ownership to

third parties and the total or partial reproduction DESCRIZIONE VISUALIZZATORE DI ALLARMI DIS.Nr REV. di N.
LISSONE (MI) ITALY of this drawing. The owner firm defend theirs
rights following rules in force. 05.03.090-01 1 11
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

A SEGNALI A CLIENTE A
(Conduttori arancioni - 1.5mmq)
SIGNAL TO CUSTOMER
(Orange electric wires - 1.5mmq)
B 3/C12 B

XC/ 32

XC/ 34

XC/ 36

XC/ 38

XC/ 60
9.13

9.17

9.21

9.25

3.11
C C

3K3 5K16 5K14 8K19 3S3

8/J8
3/J14 5/K18 5/K5
D D

9.14

9.18

9.22

9.26

3.12
XC/ 33

XC/ 35

XC/ 37

XC/ 39

XC/ 61
E E
IMPIANTO BRUCIATORE CONSENSO ALLARME
IN MARCIA ACCESO MODULAZIONE INTERVENUTO
START BURNER ON MODULATION ON ALARM BURNER

F F
197HA01-S1 197HA01-S2 197HA01-S3 197HA01-S4 197HA01-S5

G G

H H

I I

J J

K K

L L

M M

,&27(&6UO
E' vietata la cessione a terzi e la riproduzione
anche parziale del presente disegno. TITOLO QUADRO COMANDO BRUCIATORI COMMESSA DATA PAG.N.
La società proprietaria tutela i propri diritti a
rigore di legge. 07054S-01.prg 17/04/2007 9
Š

Š
€

‚ƒ

„…

€‡

ˆ‰

Œƒ

„…

Ž

It is not allow the transfer of the ownership to

third parties and the total or partial reproduction DESCRIZIONE SEGNALI A CLIENTE DIS.Nr REV. di N.
LISSONE (MI) ITALY of this drawing. The owner firm defend theirs
rights following rules in force. 05.03.090-01 1 11
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

A CASSA (mm) : 1000x600x250 A

150 150
CONTROL PANEL : 1000x600x250 mm

B B

100
25x80

2F1 5K12
C C
8A7= VISUALIZZATORE

140
DISPLAY 2Q1

D 174 4A3= LIMITE MAX TEMP.

D
48
CONTROLE MAX TEMP.
2F2 2F3 5K13
8A7
4A3
MESSAGE DISPLAY ERO ELECTRONIC KDMC= COPERCHIO PER 25x80
REM

DISPLAY ST7800

48
RESET

4K5 4K7 4K9 4K11 5K15 6K17

E E
84

ALM

LIMITROL LHL

120
3 S 3 = REMOTO - LOCALE
REMOTE-LOCAL

F 4K4 4K6 4K8 4K10 5K14 5K16 F

3P2= PULSANTE MARCIA
BURNER START

40x80
25x80

40x80
G
3P3= PULSANTE ARRESTO 3K2 3K4
G
KDMC BURNER STOP

152.5

858
3P5= PULSANTE RESET
RESET
H 3K1 3K3 8K19 H

25x80

I I

3S3 3P2 3P3 3P5 5A3

155
J J
100

6A5

40x80
K K
" XC " " XB "

EMERGENZA

140
L 2T1 L
140

EMERGENCY

M 556 M

,&27(&6UO
E' vietata la cessione a terzi e la riproduzione
anche parziale del presente disegno. TITOLO QUADRO COMANDO BRUCIATORI COMMESSA DATA PAG.N.
La società proprietaria tutela i propri diritti a
rigore di legge. 07054S-01.prg 17/04/2007 10
š

š
‘

’“

”•

—

˜™

œ“

”•

ž‘

It is not allow the transfer of the ownership to

third parties and the total or partial reproduction DESCRIZIONE ARMADIO GENERALE DIS.Nr REV. di N.
LISSONE (MI) ITALY of this drawing. The owner firm defend theirs
rights following rules in force. 05.03.090-01 1 11
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

A A

B
197HM12DPT1 B

PG11 PG11

C C

PG11 PG11

D D

E E

ALTO
+197TH01
200
F F

TRASMETTITORE DIFFERENZIALE
COLLEGAMENTI ELETTRICI
G A CURA CLIENTE G
F-JB197TH01 PRESSURE TRANSMITTER
ELECTRICAL CONNECTION
CUSTOMER CARE

H H

I I
150

ATTENZIONE
J J
COLLEGARE LA CANDELA CON CAVO POSATO
SEPARATO DAI CAVI DI POTENZA O AUSILIARI
CHE POSSONO INDURRE DISTURBI.

K CAUTION K

CONNECT THE SPARK PLUG WITH CABLE SEPARATE

FROM POWER AND CONTROL CABLES
IN ORDER TO AVOID INTERFERENCE PROBLEMS.
L L

M M

,&27(&6UO
E' vietata la cessione a terzi e la riproduzione
anche parziale del presente disegno. TITOLO QUADRO COMANDO BRUCIATORI COMMESSA DATA PAG.N.
La società proprietaria tutela i propri diritti a
rigore di legge. 07054S-01.prg 17/04/2007 11
ª

ª
 ¡

¢£

¤¥

 §

¨©

£

¤¥

®¡

It is not allow the transfer of the ownership to

third parties and the total or partial reproduction DESCRIZIONE TRASMETTITORE DIFFERENZIALE E CASSETTA BRUCIATORE DIS.Nr REV. di N.
LISSONE (MI) ITALY of this drawing. The owner firm defend theirs
rights following rules in force. 05.03.090-01 1 11
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

TRASFORM. ACCENSIONE
IGNITION TRANSFORMER
A A

SERVO REG.FIAMMA
SERVOMOTOR
B B

COMMON

RISERVA
COMUNE

SPARE
C C

BLUE

RED
-

+
D D

197HM15HCV1-W1

197HM15HCV1-W2
E E

F F

0220
5.13
5.6

7.2
7.4
F-JB197TH01

0
0
G G
B/

14
20
21
23
24
0
H
0
1 H

2
3
4
1
2
I I

J J
DA MORSETTIERA " XB "

TO BORNES "XB"
CABEL 3x1mmq SCH
CAVO 3x1mmq SCH

CURA CLIENTE

CUSTOMER CARE
CABLE 10x1.5mmq

TO BORNES "XB"
CAVO 10x1.5mmq

A CURA CLIENTE
A MORSETTIERA '' XB ''

CUSTOMER CARE

K K

L L

,&27(&6UO
E' vietata la cessione a terzi e la riproduzione
anche parziale del presente disegno. TITOLO QUADRO COMANDO BRUCIATORI COMMESSA DATA PAG.N.
La società proprietaria tutela i propri diritti a
M rigore di legge. 07054S-01.prg 17/04/2007 1 M
º

º
°±

²³

´µ

°·

¸¹

¼³

´µ

¾±

It is not allow the transfer of the ownership to

third parties and the total or partial reproduction DESCRIZIONE MORSETTIERA ''B'' CASS. DERIVAZIONE 197TH01 DIS.Nr REV. di N.
LISSONE (MI) ITALY of this drawing. The owner firm defend theirs
rights following rules in force. BORNES "B" 05.03.090mor-01 1 4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
 I
E

L
F

K
H
D
C
B
A

M
ÀÁ

ÂÃ

ÄÅ

ÀÇ

1
1

ÈÉ

Ë Ê

ÌÃ

ÄÅ

2
2

Ê
XB/
Å

ÎÁ

,&27(&6UO
Ê

3
3

LISSONE (MI) ITALY

Ï Ê

À
SCH
Í

0 0

4
4

COMUNE 0 0
COMMON
0 0
0 0

5
5

rigore di legge.
0 0

P
1 4.6
PRES. ARIA PROCESSO
PDSAL107-W1

rights following rules in force.

2 4.10

6
6

PROCESS AIR PRESSURE SWITCH

3 4.11

anche parziale del presente disegno.

P
4 4.15

La società proprietaria tutela i propri diritti a

of this drawing. The owner firm defend theirs

It is not allow the transfer of the ownership to
PRES. MAX GAS

E' vietata la cessione a terzi e la riproduzione

7
7

PDSAH105-W1

third parties and the total or partial reproduction

HIGH GAS PRESSURE SWITCH 5 4.16
6 4.17

P
6 4.17

TITOLO

8
8

PRES. MIN. GAS

PDSAL104-W1 7 4.18

DESCRIZIONE
LOW GAS PRESSURE SWITCH
8 4.19
P

PRESS.ARIA COMBUR. 9 5.10

9
9

COMBUSTION AIR PRESSURE SWITCH

PDSAL106-W1 10 5.8
E. VALV.TEST P.A.C. 26 5.15

BORNES "XB"
1 25 5.22

10
10

EV108-W1
CAVO4x1.5mmq SCH 2 11 5.21
LUNGH. CAVO 20mt

MORSETTIERA ''XB''
A CELL. RIL. FIAMMA 3 12 5.9
A CURA ICOTEC

11
11

15BF-W1 4 13 5.11

QUADRO COMANDO BRUCIATORI

EV. BLOCCO GAS BR. MV103-W1 2 14 5.13
GAS SHUT-OFF SOLENOID VALVE
EV. SICUR. GAS BR. MV102-W1 15 5.17

12
12

GAS SAFETY SOLENOID VALVE

MV100-W1 16 6.1
EV.SICUREZZA PILOTA
GAS SAFETY SOLENOID VALVE PILOT 17 6.2
MV101-W1
EV.BLOCCO PILOTA
GAS SHUT-OFF SOLENOID VALVE PILOT
P

18 4.21

13
13

PRESS.SICUREZZA GAS
PDSAL109-W1 19 6.3
GAS PRESSURE
3 20 5.6
CAVO 10x1.5mmq

14
14

DA MORSETTIERA " B " 4 21 230

A CURA CLIENTE
CABEL 10x1.5mmq 1 23 7.2
CUSTOMER CARE
TO BORNES "B" 2 24 7.4
15
15

SCH
CAVO 3x1mmq SCH
DA MORSETTIERA " B "
CURA CLIENTE
CABEL 3x1mmq SCH
16
16

CUSTOMER CARE
TO BORNES "B"
DIS.Nr
COMMESSA

17
17

07054S-01.prg

05.03.090mor-01
18
18

CAUTION
ATTENZIONE

19
19

1
FG7 CABLE

REV.
DATA
CAVI ELETTRICI FG7
ED AUSILIARI CHE POSSONO INDURRE DISTURBI

IN ORDER TO AVOID INTERFERENCE PROBLEMS

17/04/2007

20
20

IN TUBO O CONDOTTO SEPARATO DAI CAVI DI POTENZA

COLLEGARE L'ELETTRODO CON CAVO NORMALE POSATO

CONNECT THE FLAME ROD WITH NORMAL CABLE LAIED

IN A TUBE SEPARATE FROM POWER AND CONTROL CABLE

4
2
di N.
PAG.N.
I

L
F
E

K
H
D
C
B
A

M
 I
E

L
F

K
H
D
C
B
A

M
ÐÑ

ÒÓ

ÔÕ

1
1

Ð×

ØÙ

Û Ú

ÜÓ

2
2

ÔÕ

ÞÑ
XC/

3
3

,&27(&6UO
Ú

LISSONE (MI) ITALY

ß Ú

Ý
CAVO 4x2.5mmq
Ô

CURA CLIENTE 1 R R

4
4

CABEL 4x2.5mmq
CUSTOMER CARE 2 S
3 T T
4 N

5
5

rigore di legge.

6
6

rights following rules in force.

197HA01-K6 1 24
RESET CLIENTE

anche parziale del presente disegno.

RESET 2 3.8

7
7

La società proprietaria tutela i propri diritti a

of this drawing. The owner firm defend theirs

It is not allow the transfer of the ownership to
3 3.1

E' vietata la cessione a terzi e la riproduzione

third parties and the total or partial reproduction

EMERGENZA CLIENTE
CUSTOMER EMERGENCY 4 24
197HA01-K1 5 3.2

8
8

TITOLO
MARCIA CLIENTE
START 6 3.3

DESCRIZIONE
197HA01-K2 7 3.6
ARRESTO CLIENTE

9
9

STOP 8 3.7
197HM23-PDS1
PRESS.MINIMA ARIA P 9 4.11
ESTRAZIONE 10 4.12

10
10

BORNES "XC"
A CURA CLIENTE
LOW EXHAUST 11 4.13
PRESSURE SWITCH
197HA01-K5 13 5.3
CONS.MODULAZ.

11
11

MODULATION ON 14 5.4

MORSETTIERA ''XC''
1 15 7.1
CAVO 3x1mmq SCH COMANDO 4 : 20mA

QUADRO COMANDO BRUCIATORI

CURA CLIENTE 2 16 7.3 DA SALA QUADRI

12
12

CABEL 3x1mmq SCH 4 : 20mA SIGNAL

CUSTOMER CARE SCH
FROM CUSTOMER
25 4.15
CV

197HA01-K3
26 4.13

13
13

CONTATTI VENTILATORE
FAN CONTACT 27 4.13
197HA01-K4 28 4.14

14
14

CV

32 9.13 IMPIANTO IN MARCIA

START
33 9.14
197HA01-S1
34 9.17 BRUCIATORE ACCESO

15
15

BURNER ON
35 9.18
197HA01-S2
36 9.21 CONSENSO MODULAZIONE
MODULATION ON
16
16

37 9.22
197HA01-S3
38 9.25 ALLARME BRUCIATORE
BURNER ALARM
39 9.26
17
17

197HA01-S4
60 3.11 SELETTORE REMOTO/LOCALE
DIS.Nr

LOCAL/REMOTE SELECTOR
COMMESSA

61 3.12
197HA01-S5
18
18

07054S-01.prg

05.03.090mor-01
19
19

1
REV.
DATA

20
20

17/04/2007

4
3
di N.
PAG.N.
I

L
F
E

K
H
D
C
B
A

M
 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

A A

DESCRIZIONE COMPONENTE TAG COMPONENTE NUMERO CAVO

COMPONENT DESCRIPTION TAG COMPONENT CABLE NUMBER

B VALVOLA SICUREZZA GAS PILOTA MV100 MV100-W1 B

GAS SAFETY SOLENOID VALVE PILOT

VALVOLA BLOCCO GAS PILOTA MV101 MV101-W1

GAS SHUT-OFF SOLENOID VALVE PILOT
C C
VALVOLA SICUREZZA GAS MV102 MV102-W1
GAS SAFETY SOLENOID VALVE

VALVOLA BLOCCO GAS MV103 MV103-W1

D GAS SHUT-OFF SOLENOID VALVE D

PRESSOSTATO MINIMA GAS PDSAL104 PDSAL104-W1

LOW GAS PRESSURE SWITCH
E E
PRESSOSTATO MASSIMA GAS PDSAH105 PDSAH105-W1
HIGH GAS PRESSURE SWITCH

PRESSOSTATO MINIMA ARIA COMBURENTE PDSAL106 PDSAL106-W1

F LOW COMBUSTION AIR PRESSURE SWITCH F

PRESSOSTATO MINIMA ARIA PROCESSO PDSAL107 PDSAL107-W1

PROCESS AIR PRESSURE SWITCH

G G
ELETTROVALVOLA A 3 VIE EV108 EV108-W1
SOLENOID VALVE

PRESSOSTATO CONTROLLO TENUTA PDSAL109 PDSAL109-W1

GAS VALVE PROVING SYSTEM PRESSURE SW.
H H

TRASMETTITORE PRESSIONE DIFFERENZIALE 197HM12DPT1 197HM12DPT1-W1

PRESSURE TRANSMITTER

I CELLULA UV 15BF 15BF-W1 I

UV CELL

SERVOMOTORE VALVOLA GAS 197HM15HCV1 197HM15HCV1-W1

SERVOMOTOR 197HM15HCV1-W2
J J

TRASFORMATORE ACCENSIONE E11 E11-W1

IGNITION TRANSFORMER

K CANDELA ACCENSIONE E12 E12-W1 K

IGNITION SPARK

L L

M M

,&27(&6UO
E' vietata la cessione a terzi e la riproduzione
anche parziale del presente disegno. TITOLO QUADRO COMANDO BRUCIATORI COMMESSA DATA PAG.N.
La società proprietaria tutela i propri diritti a
rigore di legge. 07054S-01.prg 17/04/2007 4
ê

ê
àá

âã

äå

àç

èé

ìã

äå

îá

It is not allow the transfer of the ownership to

third parties and the total or partial reproduction DESCRIZIONE TAG DIS.Nr REV. di N.
LISSONE (MI) ITALY of this drawing. The owner firm defend theirs
rights following rules in force. TAG 05.03.090mor-01 1 4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

SCHEMA ELETTRICO QUADRO BRUCIATORE LATO SECCO

A A

B +197MH02 - G2 B

C
ELECTRIC WIRING BURNER CONTROL PANEL DRY SIDE C
NOTE TERMOCOPPIE - THERMOCOUPLE NOTES

MODELLO BRUCIATORE Modello Natura del cond. Colori conduttori Guaina Norme
BURNER TYPE EB 6 Type Wires mat. Wires colors Sheath Codes
D D
_ _
+ +
QUANTITA' BRUCIATORI
E E
BURNERS NUMBER Fe Cost Rosso Blu Blu DIN
J
F e Cost Red Blue Blue DIN
F F
ALIMENTAZIONE
SUPPLY 400V - 50Hz + PE [600VA]
Fe Cost Bianco Rosso Nero ANSI
G J G
F e Cost White Red Black ANSI
AUSILIARI
AUXILIARY 230/24VAC - 50Hz + PE
H ATTENZIONE H
Collegare le termocoppie con cavo compensato direttamente
allo strumento in condotto separato dai cavi di potenza ed ausiliari
POTENZA MOTORI
I MOTORS POWER che possono indurre disturbi. I
CAUTION
Connect the thermocouple with compensation cable straight
the instrument in a tube separate from power and control cables
J in order to avoid interference problems. J

K K

L 1 17/04/2007 MODIFICHE AP FD L

0 07/03/2007 EMISSIONE AP FD

M REV. DATA DESCRIZIONE Dis. Contr. M

REV. DATE DESCRIPTION Drw. By Ckd. By

,&27(&6UO
E' vietata la cessione a terzi e la riproduzione
anche parziale del presente disegno. TITOLO QUADRO COMANDO BRUCIATORI COMMESSA DATA PAG.N.
La società proprietaria tutela i propri diritti a
rigore di legge. 07054D-01.prg 17/04/2007 1







It is not allow the transfer of the ownership to

third parties and the total or partial reproduction DESCRIZIONE COPERTINA DIS.Nr REV. di N.
LISSONE (MI) ITALY of this drawing. The owner firm defend theirs
rights following rules in force. 05.03.091-01 1 11
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

A A
F2

F3
B B
2F2
2A

C C

2.9

2.2
D D

E C1 E
2.5mmq
C 400V
2.5mmq
2T1
F 200/400VA F
1 3 5 24V 230V

2Q1

2.1

2.3
2 4 6
G 2F1 2F3 G

H H

024

230
0
C C2
2.5mmq 1.5mmq
I R T I
XC/ N

XC/ R

XC/ S

XC/ T

J 4/A1 J
3/K1

3/A1
2A1
K K

ALIMENTAZIONE ALIMENTAZIONE
400V-50Hz AUSILIARI
L DA CLIENTE AUX. SUPPLY L
600VA
SUPPLY

M M

,&27(&6UO
E' vietata la cessione a terzi e la riproduzione
anche parziale del presente disegno. TITOLO QUADRO COMANDO BRUCIATORI COMMESSA DATA PAG.N.
La società proprietaria tutela i propri diritti a
rigore di legge. 07054D-01.prg 17/04/2007 2



















It is not allow the transfer of the ownership to

third parties and the total or partial reproduction DESCRIZIONE ALIMENTAZIONE AUSILIARI DIS.Nr REV. di N.
LISSONE (MI) ITALY of this drawing. The owner firm defend theirs
rights following rules in force. 05.03.091-01 1 11
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

2/K20
024 24
A A

XC/ 60
3.11
CHIUSO=REMOTO
APERTO=LOCALE
L R
B 3S1 CLOSE=REM 3K2 3K3 B
3S3 OPEN=LOC
3/J10 3/J14

REMOTO LOCALE 3S3

EMERGENZA
EMERGENCY REMOTE LOCAL 3.5
9/F6

3.12
3.4
C C

XC/ 61
3.2
3P3

3.1
3P2

D MARCIA ARRESTO D

3.6
START STOP
XC/ 3

XC/ 5

XC/ 7

XC/ 1
E E
3S2
3P1 3P4 3P5 3P6

F F
XC/ 4

XC/ 6

XC/ 8

XC/ 2
EMERGENZA MARCIA ARRESTO RESET
CLIENTE 24 CLIENTE 3.3 CLIENTE CLIENTE

3.7
CUSTOMER START STOP
ALARMS RESET
EMERGENCY

3.8
G 197HA02-K1 197HA02-K2 197HA02-K6 G

H H

I I
T31
3K2 3K3 3K1 A1
A1 A1 A1

A2
J J
A2 A2 A2

2/J20
0 4/K1

3/B14 5/B19
3/B16 8/C9
K 4/H19 6/H14 K
4/C2
8/A20
9/D7

L MARCIA ARRESTO RESET ALLARMI L

IMPIANTO IMPIANTO ALARMS RESET
START STOP

M M

,&27(&6UO
E' vietata la cessione a terzi e la riproduzione
anche parziale del presente disegno. TITOLO QUADRO COMANDO BRUCIATORI COMMESSA DATA PAG.N.
La società proprietaria tutela i propri diritti a
rigore di legge. 07054D-01.prg 17/04/2007 3
*

*
!

"#

$%

&

'

()

,#

$%

.!

It is not allow the transfer of the ownership to

third parties and the total or partial reproduction DESCRIZIONE AUSILIARI DIS.Nr REV. di N.
LISSONE (MI) ITALY of this drawing. The owner firm defend theirs
rights following rules in force. 05.03.091-01 1 11
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

2/J20
230
A A
4.15
XB/1
4B1 4B3

B 4F4 4F5 P P B
6Agl 500mA

4.1 PDSAL207 PDSAH205

C 3K3 C

4.16
4.10

4.11

4.17
4.4
3/J14

XB/ 2

XB/ 3

XB/ 4

XB/ 5

XB/ 6
4.2

4.5
D D

XC/ 25
A21

XC/ 9

XB/ 6
197HM23-PDS2
7 9 8
197HA02-K3

E E
ERO - LDS 4B4
CV
P P
6 10 2 3

F PDSAL204 F
--
+
PRESS.MINIMA

XC/ 10

XC/ 11

XC/ 26

XB/ 7

XB/ 8
ARIA ESTRAZ.
E CONT.VENT.

4.18

4.19
DA CLIENTE
4.13
LOW AIR,
G CONTACT
G
EXHAUST

XC/ 27
8K19
8/J8
4.3

TC "J" CV
H 4.20 H

197HA02-K4 3K2 4K11

3/J10 4/J19
197HM04/B-TE1

XC/ 28
I N.B. 4.21 I
6/A1
LEGGERE LE NOTE

4.14
4.12
A PAGINA 1
4K4 4K6 4K7 4K8 4K9 4K10 4K11
A1 READ NOTE A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1
ON PAGE 1 4H1
J 3/D10 J
A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2

3/K20 5/L1

8/A2 8/A3 8/A4 8/A5 8/A7 8/A8 4/H20

K K

ALLARME MASS.TEMP. ALLARME ALLARME CONT. ALLARME LIMITI

HIGH TEMPERATURE ALARM ARIA PROCES. PRESS.MIN.GAS CHIUSI
VENTILATORI
LOW PROCESS AIR BLOWERS CONTACT LOW GAS PRESS. LIMITS CLOSED
L L
PRESSURE ALARM ALARM ALARM
LIMITE
MASSIMA TEMP. ALLARME ALLARME CONSENSI
HIGH TEMPERATURE ARIA ESTRAZ. PRESS.MAX GAS REGOLARI
LIMIT EXHAUST AIR HIGH GAS LIMITS ON
M ALARM PRESSURE ALARM M

,&27(&6UO
E' vietata la cessione a terzi e la riproduzione
anche parziale del presente disegno. TITOLO QUADRO COMANDO BRUCIATORI COMMESSA DATA PAG.N.
La società proprietaria tutela i propri diritti a
rigore di legge. 07054D-01.prg 17/04/2007 4
:

:
01

23

45

07

89

<3

45

>1

It is not allow the transfer of the ownership to

third parties and the total or partial reproduction DESCRIZIONE CATENA SICUREZZE BRUCIATORE DIS.Nr REV. di N.
LISSONE (MI) ITALY of this drawing. The owner firm defend theirs
rights following rules in force. 05.03.091-01 1 11
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
4/A20
230 6/A1
5/A16
0 5/A10
A A
REM.KEYBOARD
DYSPLAY S7800
PRESS. 3 5

XB/ 0
ARIA
B MICRO COMB. B
5.8

5.12

5.14
BASSO 7/E1 LOW COMBUSTION EV208
FUOCO AIR PRESSURE
LOW FIRE SWITCH E.VALV 5B7 5K15 3K1
MICRO SWITCH PAC TEST
5/K7 3/J17
PDSAL206 P.A.C.
C COMBUSTION AIR C
PRESS. SW. 5.23
SOL. VALVE TEST

5.15
5.10
5.6
D D

XB/ 10

XB/ 26
XB/ 9
5.18 6/D1
5A4

E E
13 4 17 18 19 7 16 20 5 6

EC 7850 (220Vac)
F F
14 3 N 22 F G 10 9 8

5.7
G G
5.3

5.5
230V

5.11

5.13

5.17

5.19
5.9
5T1
XC/ 13

10VA
H 6/C1 H
120V 16BF-W1

XB/ 12

XB/ 13
XB/ 25

XB/ 11
CONSENSO CAVO
MODULAZIONE 4x1.5mmq SCH

XB/ 14

XB/ 15
5.22

5.21
DA CLIENTE LUNGH. 20mt
I MODULATION ON I

B/ 14
197HA02-K5
W W B Y
XC/ 14

5T2 5B5 5B6

5A5
5.4

J J
CELL UV C 7061 A
5K14 5K15 16-BF 5K16

B/ 0

XB/ 0

XB/ 0
A1 A1 A1

K K
A2 A2 A2 7/K1
0 XB/ 0
4/K20 6/K1
MV203
7/D8 5/B18 9/D8
EV.BLOCCO
L 7/D10 8/A9
BRUCIAT. L
9/D10 E22 GAS SHUT-OFF
E21 SOLENOID VALVE MV202
CONSENSO BLOCCO TRASFORMATORE EV.SICUREZZA BRUCIATORE
MODULAZIONE CONTROLLO FIAMMA ACCENSIONE BRUCIAT. ACCESO
M MODULATION ON BURNER FLAME-OFF IGNITION GAS SAFETY BURNER ON M
TRANSFORMER SOLENOID VALVE

,&27(&6UO
E' vietata la cessione a terzi e la riproduzione
anche parziale del presente disegno. TITOLO QUADRO COMANDO BRUCIATORI COMMESSA DATA PAG.N.
La società proprietaria tutela i propri diritti a
rigore di legge. 07054D-01.prg 17/04/2007 5
J

J
@A

BC

DE

@G

HI

LC

DE

NA

It is not allow the transfer of the ownership to

third parties and the total or partial reproduction DESCRIZIONE CONTROLLO DI FIAMMA DIS.Nr REV. di N.
LISSONE (MI) ITALY of this drawing. The owner firm defend theirs
rights following rules in force. 05.03.091-01 1 11
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
5/A20
230 7/B1

4/I20
4.21
A A

XB/ 18
B B
5/H20
5.19
PRESSOSTATO
6B9 SICUREZZA
PDSAL209 GAS
C P C
PRESSOSTAT
PROVING
5.18 SYSTEM

6.3
5/E20

XB/ 19
D D

6A6
E E

12 14 7 15 3 10 9 1

F A4021A (220Vac) F

4 5 6 16 8 2 11

G G

6.4
6.1

6.2
3K1
H 3/J17
H

6.5
I I

XB/ 16

XB/ 17
6B7 6B8

J J
6K17
A1
XB/ 0

XB/ 0
A2
K 0 K
5/L20 7/K1

8/A10
MV200 MV201
L L
EV.SICUREZZA EV.BLOCCO
PILOTA PILOTA
CONTROLLO (VEDERE (VEDERE BLOCCO
TENUTA VALVOLE DIS.MECCANICO) DIS.MECCANICO) CONTROLLO
GAS VALVE PILOT SAFETY PILOT SHUT-OFF TENUTA VALVOLE
M PROVING SYSTEM SOLENOID VALVE SOLENOID VALVE FAULT GAS VALVE M
PROV. SYSTEM

,&27(&6UO
E' vietata la cessione a terzi e la riproduzione
anche parziale del presente disegno. TITOLO QUADRO COMANDO BRUCIATORI COMMESSA DATA PAG.N.
La società proprietaria tutela i propri diritti a
rigore di legge. 07054D-01.prg 17/04/2007 6
Z

Z
PQ

RS

TU

PW

XY

\S

TU

^Q

It is not allow the transfer of the ownership to

third parties and the total or partial reproduction DESCRIZIONE CONTROLLO TENUTA VALVOLE DIS.Nr REV. di N.
LISSONE (MI) ITALY of this drawing. The owner firm defend theirs
rights following rules in force. 05.03.091-01 1 11
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

A A
197HM16-HCV1
230
6/A20
COMANDO 4 : 20mA
DA SALA QUADRI
B 4 : 20mA SIGNAL B
FROM CUSTOMER

+ -
C C

XC/ S C H
XC/ 15

XC/ 16
7.1

7.3
D D
5K14 5K14
5/K5 5/K5

5/B9
5.6
E E

XB/ S C H
B/ 20 XB/ 20

B/ 21 XB/ 21

B/ 23 XB/ 23

B/ 24 XB/ 24
7.2

7.4
F F

7A7

BLUE RED + -
G 220V G

LOW FIRE
MICRO T1 T2
SWITCH 24V
H H
M7284C1000
197HM16-HCV1

I I

J J
B/ 0

5/K20
0
K 0 K
6/K20 8/K1

L L

SERVOMOTORE
REGOLAZIONE FIAMMA
M SERVOMOTOR M

,&27(&6UO
E' vietata la cessione a terzi e la riproduzione
anche parziale del presente disegno. TITOLO QUADRO COMANDO BRUCIATORI COMMESSA DATA PAG.N.
La società proprietaria tutela i propri diritti a
rigore di legge. 07054D-01.prg 17/04/2007 7
j

j
`a

bc

de

`g

hi

lc

de

na

It is not allow the transfer of the ownership to

third parties and the total or partial reproduction DESCRIZIONE SERVOMOTORE DIS.Nr REV. di N.
LISSONE (MI) ITALY of this drawing. The owner firm defend theirs
rights following rules in force. 05.03.091-01 1 11
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

8.1
A A

4K4 4K6 4K7 4K8 4K9 4K10 5K15 6K17 3K1

4/J2 4/J11 4/J13 4/J14 4/J16 4/J17 5/K7 6/J16 3/J17

B B

8.10

8.11
8.2

8.3

8.4

8.5

8.6

8.7

8.9
C T31 C
3/I19

8.12
8A8
D D

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

E T MAX ALL.PAP ALLPAE ALL.VENT. PGMAX PGMIN ALL.C.F. ALL.C.T. SPARE SPARE SPARE SPARE SPARE SPARE RESET ACK E
TMAX RESET

F F

ICD 15-R
G G

H H
19 20 17 18

I I
8.8

J J
8K19
A1

24 HC2-24Vdc
4/A9 A2
K OMRON K
0 8.1
7/K20

4/G19
ATTENZIONE 9/D12
INGUAINARE I CAVI DI SEGNALE DOPO
L L
AVERLI TWISTATI IN MODO DA SEPARARLI
DA OGNI ALTRO CAVO DI POTENZA CHE VA A FRONTE QUADRO
USE CABLE LAIED IN A TUBE SEPARATE ALLARME
FROM POWER CABLE ALARM
IN ORDER TO AVOID INTERFERENCE PROBLEMS
M M

,&27(&6UO
E' vietata la cessione a terzi e la riproduzione
anche parziale del presente disegno. TITOLO QUADRO COMANDO BRUCIATORI COMMESSA DATA PAG.N.
La società proprietaria tutela i propri diritti a
rigore di legge. 07054D-01.prg 17/04/2007 8
z

z
pq

rs

tu

pw

xy

|s

tu

~q

It is not allow the transfer of the ownership to

third parties and the total or partial reproduction DESCRIZIONE VISUALIZZATORE DI ALLARMI DIS.Nr REV. di N.
LISSONE (MI) ITALY of this drawing. The owner firm defend theirs
rights following rules in force. 05.03.091-01 1 11
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

A SEGNALI A CLIENTE A
(Conduttori arancioni - 1.5mmq)
SIGNAL TO CUSTOMER
(Orange electric wires - 1.5mmq)
B 3/C12 B

XC/ 32

XC/ 34

XC/ 36

XC/ 38

XC/ 60
9.13

9.17

9.21

9.25

3.11
C C

3K3 5K16 5K14 8K19 3S3

8/J8
3/J14 5/K18 5/K5
D D

9.14

9.18

9.22

9.26

3.12
XC/ 33

XC/ 35

XC/ 37

XC/ 39

XC/ 61
E E
IMPIANTO BRUCIATORE CONSENSO ALLARME
IN MARCIA ACCESO MODULAZIONE INTERVENUTO
START BURNER ON MODULATION ON ALARM BURNER

F F
197HA02-S1 197HA02-S2 197HA02-S3 197HA02-S4 197HA02-S5

G G

H H

I I

J J

K K

L L

M M

,&27(&6UO
E' vietata la cessione a terzi e la riproduzione
anche parziale del presente disegno. TITOLO QUADRO COMANDO BRUCIATORI COMMESSA DATA PAG.N.
La società proprietaria tutela i propri diritti a
rigore di legge. 07054D-01.prg 17/04/2007 9
Š

Š
€

‚ƒ

„…

€‡

ˆ‰

Œƒ

„…

Ž

It is not allow the transfer of the ownership to

third parties and the total or partial reproduction DESCRIZIONE SEGNALI A CLIENTE DIS.Nr REV. di N.
LISSONE (MI) ITALY of this drawing. The owner firm defend theirs
rights following rules in force. 05.03.091-01 1 11
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

A CASSA (mm) : 1000x600x250 A

150 150 CONTROL PANEL : 1000x600x250 mm

B B

100
25x80

2F1 5K12
C C
8A7= VISUALIZZATORE

140
DISPLAY 2Q1
174 48
D
4A3= LIMITE MAX TEMP.
D
8A7 CONTROLE MAX TEMP.
2F2 2F3 5K13
4A3
MESSAGE DISPLAY
25x80
ERO ELECTRONIC

REM KDMC= COPERCHIO PER

48
RESET

DISPLAY ST7800
84

ALM

4K5 4K7 4K9 4K11 5K15 6K17

E LIMITROL LHL
E

120
3 S 3 = REMOTO - LOCALE
REMOTE-LOCAL

F 4K4 4K6 4K8 4K10 5K14 5K16 F

3P2= PULSANTE MARCIA
BURNER START

40x80
25x80

40x80
G
3P3= PULSANTE ARRESTO 3K2 3K4
G
KDMC BURNER STOP

152.5

858
3P5= PULSANTE RESET
RESET
H 3K1 3K3 8K19 H

25x80

I I

3S3 3P2 3P3 3P5 5A3

155
J J
100

6A5

40x80
K K
" XC " " XB "

EMERGENZA

140
L EMERGENCY 2T1 L
140

M 556 M

,&27(&6UO
E' vietata la cessione a terzi e la riproduzione
anche parziale del presente disegno. TITOLO QUADRO COMANDO BRUCIATORI COMMESSA DATA PAG.N.
La società proprietaria tutela i propri diritti a
rigore di legge. 07054D-01.prg 17/04/2007 10
š

š
‘

’“

”•

—

˜™

œ“

”•

ž‘

It is not allow the transfer of the ownership to

third parties and the total or partial reproduction DESCRIZIONE ARMADIO GENERALE DIS.Nr REV. di N.
LISSONE (MI) ITALY of this drawing. The owner firm defend theirs
rights following rules in force. 05.03.091-01 1 11
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

A A

197HM13DPT1
B B
PG11 PG11

C C

PG11 PG11

D D

E E
ALTO
+197TH02
200

F F
TRASMETTITORE DIFFERENZIALE
COLLEGAMENTI ELETTRICI
A CURA CLIENTE
PRESSURE TRANSMITTER
G G
ELECTRICAL CONNECTION
CUSTOMER CARE
F-JB197TH02
H H

I I
150

ATTENZIONE
J COLLEGARE LA CANDELA CON CAVO POSATO J
SEPARATO DAI CAVI DI POTENZA O AUSILIARI
CHE POSSONO INDURRE DISTURBI.

CAUTION
K K
CONNECT THE SPARK PLUG WITH CABLE SEPARATE
FROM POWER AND CONTROL CABLES
IN ORDER TO AVOID INTERFERENCE PROBLEMS.

L L

M M

,&27(&6UO
E' vietata la cessione a terzi e la riproduzione
anche parziale del presente disegno. TITOLO QUADRO COMANDO BRUCIATORI COMMESSA DATA PAG.N.
La società proprietaria tutela i propri diritti a
rigore di legge. 07054D-01.prg 17/04/2007 11
ª

ª
 ¡

¢£

¤¥

 §

¨©

£

¤¥

®¡

It is not allow the transfer of the ownership to

third parties and the total or partial reproduction DESCRIZIONE TRASMETTITORE DIFFERENZIALE CASSETTA BRUCIATORE DIS.Nr REV. di N.
LISSONE (MI) ITALY of this drawing. The owner firm defend theirs
rights following rules in force. 05.03.091-01 1 11
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

TRASFORM. ACCENSIONE
IGNITION TRANSFORMER
A A

SERVO REG.FIAMMA
SERVOMOTOR
B B

COMMON

RISERVA
COMUNE

SPARE
C C

BLUE

RED
-

+
D D

197HM16HCV1-W1

197HM16HCV1-W2
E E

F F

0220
5.13
5.6

7.2
7.4
F-JB197TH02

0
0
G G
B/

14
20
21
23
24
0
H 0
1 H

2
3
4
1
2
I I

J J
A MORSETTIERA '' XB ''

DA MORSETTIERA " XB "

TO BORNES "XB"
CABEL 3x1mmq SCH
CAVO 3x1mmq SCH

CURA CLIENTE

CUSTOMER CARE
CABLE 10x1.5mmq

TO BORNES "XB"
CAVO 10x1.5mmq

A CURA CLIENTE

CUSTOMER CARE

K K

L L

,&27(&6UO
E' vietata la cessione a terzi e la riproduzione
anche parziale del presente disegno. TITOLO QUADRO COMANDO BRUCIATORI COMMESSA DATA PAG.N.
La società proprietaria tutela i propri diritti a
M rigore di legge. 07054D-01.prg 17/04/2007 1 M
º

º
°±

²³

´µ

°·

¸¹

¼³

´µ

¾±

It is not allow the transfer of the ownership to

third parties and the total or partial reproduction DESCRIZIONE MORSETTIERA ''B'' CASS. DERIVAZIONE +197TH02 DIS.Nr REV. di N.
LISSONE (MI) ITALY of this drawing. The owner firm defend theirs
rights following rules in force. BORNES "B" 05.03.091mor-01 1 4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
 I
E

L
F

K
H
D
C
B
A

M
ÀÁ

ÂÃ

ÄÅ

ÀÇ

1
1

ÈÉ

Ë Ê

ÌÃ

ÄÅ

2
2

Å
XB/
É

ÎÁ

,&27(&6UO
Ê

3
3

LISSONE (MI) ITALY

Ï Ê

Í
SCH
Ä

0 0

4
4

COMUNE 0 0
COMMON
0 0
0 0

5
5

rigore di legge.
0 0

P
1 4.6
PRES. ARIA PROCESSO

rights following rules in force.

PDSAL207-W1 2 4.10

6
6

PROCESS AIR PRESSURE SWITCH

3 4.11

anche parziale del presente disegno.

P
4 4.15

La società proprietaria tutela i propri diritti a

of this drawing. The owner firm defend theirs

It is not allow the transfer of the ownership to
PRES. MAX GAS

E' vietata la cessione a terzi e la riproduzione

7
7

third parties and the total or partial reproduction

PDSAH205-W1 5 4.16
HIGH GAS PRESSURE SWITCH
6 4.17

P
4.17

TITOLO
6

8
8

PRES. MIN. GAS

PDSAL204-W1

DESCRIZIONE
LOW GAS PRESSURE SWITCH 7 4.18
8 4.19
P

9 5.10

9
9

PRESS.ARIA COMBUR.
COMBUSTION AIR PRESSURE SWITCH
PDSAL206-W1 10 5.8

BORNES "XB"
E. VALV.TEST P.A.C. 26 5.15

10
10

EV208-W1
1 25 5.22

CAVO4x1.5mmq SCH 2 11 5.21

LUNGH. CAVO 20mt

MORSETTIERA ''XB''
A CELL. RIL. FIAMMA 3 12 5.9

11
11

A CURA ICOTEC
16BF-W1 4 13 5.11

QUADRO COMANDO BRUCIATORI

EV. BLOCCO GAS BR. MV203-W1 2 14 5.13
GAS SHUT-OFF SOLENOID VALVE
EV. SICUR. GAS BR. MV202-W1 15 5.17

12
12

GAS SAFETY SOLENOID VALVE

MV200-W1 16 6.1
EV.SICUREZZA PILOTA
GAS SAFETY SOLENOID VALVE PILOT 6.2
MV201-W1 17
EV.BLOCCO PILOTA
GAS SHUT-OFF SOLENOID VALVE PILOT
P

18 4.21

13
13

PRESS.SICUREZZA GAS
PDSAL209-W1 19 6.3
GAS PRESSURE
3 20 5.6
CAVO 10x1.5mmq

14
14

DA MORSETTIERA " B " 4 21 230

A CURA CLIENTE
CABEL 10x1.5mmq 1 23 7.2
CUSTOMER CARE
TO BORNES "B" 2 24 7.4
15
15

SCH
CAVO 3x1mmq SCH
DA MORSETTIERA " B "
CURA CLIENTE
CABEL 3x1mmq SCH
16
16

CUSTOMER CARE
TO BORNES "B"
DIS.Nr
COMMESSA

17
17

07054D-01.prg

05.03.091mor-01
18
18

CAUTION
ATTENZIONE

19
19

1
REV.
DATA
FG7 CABLE
CAVI ELETTRICI FG7
ED AUSILIARI CHE POSSONO INDURRE DISTURBI

IN ORDER TO AVOID INTERFERENCE PROBLEMS

17/04/2007

20
20

IN TUBO O CONDOTTO SEPARATO DAI CAVI DI POTENZA

COLLEGARE L'ELETTRODO CON CAVO NORMALE POSATO

CONNECT THE FLAME ROD WITH NORMAL CABLE LAIED

IN A TUBE SEPARATE FROM POWER AND CONTROL CABLE

4
2
di N.
PAG.N.
I

L
F
E

K
H
D
C
B
A

M
 I
E

L
F

K
H
D
C
B
A

M
ÐÑ

ÒÓ

ÔÕ

Ð×

1
1

ØÙ

Û Ú

ÜÓ

ÔÕ

2
2

ÞÑ
XC/

,&27(&6UO
Ú

3
3

LISSONE (MI) ITALY

ß Ú

Ý
CAVO 4x2.5mmq
Ô

CURA CLIENTE 1 R R
CABEL 4x2.5mmq
2

4
4

CUSTOMER CARE S
3 T T
4 N

5
5

rigore di legge.

rights following rules in force.

6
6

197HA02-K6 1 24
RESET CLIENTE

anche parziale del presente disegno.

RESET 2 3.8

La società proprietaria tutela i propri diritti a

of this drawing. The owner firm defend theirs

It is not allow the transfer of the ownership to
3 3.1

E' vietata la cessione a terzi e la riproduzione

7
7

third parties and the total or partial reproduction

EMERGENZA CLIENTE
CUSTOMER EMERGENCY 4 24
197HA02-K1 5 3.2

TITOLO
MARCIA CLIENTE

8
8

START 6 3.3

DESCRIZIONE
197HA02-K2 7 3.6
ARRESTO CLIENTE
STOP 8 3.7

9
9

197HM23-PDS2
PRESS.MINIMA ARIA P 9 4.11
ESTRAZIONE 10 4.12

BORNES "XC"
A CURA CLIENTE
LOW EXHAUST 11 4.13

10
10

PRESSURE SWITCH
197HA02-K5 13 5.3
CONS.MODULAZ.
MODULATION ON 14 5.4

MORSETTIERA ''XC''
1 15 7.1

11
11

CAVO 3x1mmq SCH COMANDO 4 : 20mA

QUADRO COMANDO BRUCIATORI

CURA CLIENTE 2 16 7.3 DA SALA QUADRI
CABEL 3x1mmq SCH 4 : 20mA SIGNAL
CUSTOMER CARE
SCH
FROM CUSTOMER

12
12

25 4.15
CV

197HA02-K3
26 4.13
CONTATTI VENTILATORE
FAN CONTACT 27 4.13

13
13

197HA02-K4 28 4.14
CV

32 9.13 IMPIANTO IN MARCIA

START
33 9.14

14
14

197HA02-S1
34 9.17 BRUCIATORE ACCESO
BURNER ON
35 9.18
197HA02-S2
15
15

36 9.21 CONSENSO MODULAZIONE

MODULATION ON
37 9.22
197HA02-S3
38 9.25 ALLARME BRUCIATORE
16
16

BURNER ALARM
39 9.26
197HA02-S4
60 3.11 SELETTORE REMOTO/LOCALE
DIS.Nr

LOCAL/REMOTE SELECTOR
COMMESSA

61 3.12
17
17

197HA02-S5
07054D-01.prg

05.03.091mor-01
18
18

19
19

1
REV.
DATA
17/04/2007

20
20

4
3
di N.
PAG.N.
I

L
F
E

K
H
D
C
B
A

M
 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

A A

DESCRIZIONE COMPONENTE TAG COMPONENTE NUMERO CAVO

COMPONENT DESCRIPTION TAG COMPONENT CABLE NUMBER

B VALVOLA SICUREZZA GAS PILOTA MV200 MV200-W1 B

GAS SAFETY SOLENOID VALVE PILOT

VALVOLA BLOCCO GAS PILOTA MV201 MV201-W1

GAS SHUT-OFF SOLENOID VALVE PILOT
C C
VALVOLA SICUREZZA GAS MV202 MV202-W1
GAS SAFETY SOLENOID VALVE

VALVOLA BLOCCO GAS MV203 MV203-W1

D GAS SHUT-OFF SOLENOID VALVE D

PRESSOSTATO MINIMA GAS PDSAL204 PDSAL204-W1

LOW GAS PRESSURE SWITCH
E E
PRESSOSTATO MASSIMA GAS PDSAH205 PDSAH205-W1
HIGH GAS PRESSURE SWITCH

PRESSOSTATO MINIMA ARIA COMBURENTE PDSAL206 PDSAL206-W1

F LOW COMBUSTION AIR PRESSURE SWITCH F

PRESSOSTATO MINIMA ARIA PROCESSO PDSAL207 PDSAL207-W1

PROCESS AIR PRESSURE SWITCH

G G
ELETTROVALVOLA A 3 VIE EV208 EV208-W1
SOLENOID VALVE

PRESSOSTATO CONTROLLO TENUTA PDSAL209 PDSAL209-W1

GAS VALVE PROVING SYSTEM PRESSURE SW.
H H

TRASMETTITORE PRESSIONE DIFFERENZIALE 197HM13DPT1 197HM13DPT1-W1

PRESSURE TRANSMITTER

I CELLULA UV 16BF 16BF-W1 I

UV CELL

SERVOMOTORE VALVOLA GAS 197HM16HCV1 197HM16HCV1-W1

SERVOMOTOR 197HM16HCV1-W2
J J

TRASFORMATORE ACCENSIONE E21 E21-W1

IGNITION TRANSFORMER

K CANDELA ACCENSIONE E22 E22-W1 K

IGNITION SPARK

L L

M M

,&27(&6UO
E' vietata la cessione a terzi e la riproduzione
anche parziale del presente disegno. TITOLO QUADRO COMANDO BRUCIATORI COMMESSA DATA PAG.N.
La società proprietaria tutela i propri diritti a
rigore di legge. 07054D-01.prg 17/04/2007 4
ê

ê
àá

âã

äå

àç

èé

ìã

äå

îá

It is not allow the transfer of the ownership to

third parties and the total or partial reproduction DESCRIZIONE TAG DIS.Nr REV. di N.
LISSONE (MI) ITALY of this drawing. The owner firm defend theirs
rights following rules in force. TAG 05.03.091mor-01 1 4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Model “400” OVENPAK® Gas Burner Page 2105

Design and Application Details

OVENPAK® Burners are nozzle-mixing gas burners
for many industrial direct-fired applications where
clean combustion and high turndown are required.
They are simple and versatile for use on a variety of
heating applications.
The Model “400” OVENPAK® Burner (shown at
right) includes a combustion air blower with non-
sparking paddle wheel-type impeller, pilot, spark
ignitor, stainless steel discharge sleeve, mixing cone,
self-contained internal air and gas proportioning
valves, and provision for your flame safeguard
sensor.

Right: Model 415 OVENPAK® Gas Burner with optional:

• combustion air filter
• connecting base and linkage assembly
• electrical control motor (by others)

Principle of operation (illustrated at left)

The OVENPAK® Burner is designed for industrial
air heating applications. It is available in two basic
versions: 1) packaged with integral combustion air
blower, or 2) for use with an external blower. Both
versions include a gas and air valve, internally linked
together to control the gas-air ratio over the full
operating range. The gas flows through the nozzle,
then along the inside of the burner cone where
combustion air is progressively and tangentially mixed
with the gas. This produces a very wide turndown
range and a highly stable flame under a variety of
operating conditions.

Cross sectional view of a Model “400” OVENPAK® Gas

Burner

10/92
 Page 2106 Model “400” OVENPAK® Gas Burners

Design and Application Details

Model “EB” (external blower) OVENPAK® Burners
(shown at right), like all OVENPAK® Burner assem-
blies, are designed to deliver heat through a patented
mixing cone and stainless steel sleeve.
Flanged burner body design on all OVENPAK®
Burner assemblies simplifies mounting and installa-
tion on your application. Burner can be installed in
any position that does not conflict with your control
motor or flame detector requirements.
Minimal torque requirements permit use of most view into
electric or air operators in conjunction with the op- cone of
tional (Maxon supplied) connecting base and linkage EB version
assemblies.
Model EB-3 OVENPAK® Burner arranged for external
blower source with connecting base and linkage assembly
to adapt customer's automatic control motor

“400-MA” and “EB-MA” versions

Model “400-MA” versions include a combustion air
blower in your choice of the voltages shown on page
2107, but provide constant combustion air volumes.
They differ from “standard” versions by use of a
slotted adjustable air butterfly locking device as
shown in photo at left. Internally, the linkage normally
cross-connecting air and gas butterflies is omitted.
In normal operation, the air butterfly is set to the
desired air differential pressure, and the fuel only is
throttled by a separate control valve. Maximum
capacities match those cataloged for “standard”
burners of equivalent size. Minimum capacities with
full air flow will be higher than those of “standard”
Model “EB-MA” OVENPAK® Burner with discharge sleeve burner.
and optional manual gas control

“EB-MRV” versions (photo at right)

“EB-MRV” versions of OVENPAK® Burners permit
air/fuel ratio control via a Maxon MICRO-RATIO®
contral valve throughout the firing range. They differ
from standard “EB” burners in that internal gas and air
butterflies and the related shafts and linkages are
omitted.
In normal operation, air and fuel will be propor-
tioned by an external Maxon MICRO-RATIO® Control
valve.
Maximum capacities match those cataloged for
“EB” burners of equivalent size and differential air
pressure. Minimum capacity and air differential
pressure will vary with your application. Model “EB-MRV” OVENPAK® Burner with optional 12"
discharge sleeve
Model “400” OVENPAK® Gas Burners Page 2107

Capacities and Specifications – 60 Hertz

Standard Model “400” OVENPAK® Burner 60 Hz Motor Voltages Available
includes a combustion air blower with motor. 115/208- 208-
Maximum capacity of Model “400” OVENPAK® Horsepower Type 575/3/60
230/1/60 230/460/3/60
Burner is affected by the static pressure within the Totally
1/3 & 1/2 X X X
combustion chamber. Data shown assumes firing in Enclosed
the open, or into an airstream with enough oxygen to 3/4 & 1
Totally
X X X
complete the combustion process. If burner is fired Enclosed
into an oxygen-starved chamber or airstream, capaci- Totally Not
1-1/2, 2 & 3 X X
Enclosed Available
ties may be reduced as much as 25-30%. Do not
attempt to operate beyond the duct static pressure
range shown. For higher back pressure applications,
select from Model “EB” or “EB-MRV” OVENPAK®
Burner options.
All gas pressures are differential pressures and
are measured at the gas pressure test connection on
the backplate of each OVENPAK® Burner. Differential
pressures shown are approximate.

Capacities and Operating Data – Model 405 through 422M

Burner Model 405 407M 408 408M 412M 413M 415 422M

Motor Horsepower: 1/3 1/2 1/3 3/4 1/2 3/4 1/3 3/4
Specification Frame Number: 48 48 48 56 48 56 48 56
-5.0 to 550 880 1650
--- -- --- --- ---
-0.5" wc 2.8" 3.4" 1.7"
D 500 750 800 790 1200 1300 1500 2150
±0" wc
U 2.3" 2.5" 2.8" 2.7" 2.8" 3.3" 1.4" 2.9"
C 475 700 760 750 1100 1190 1425 2000
Maximum T +1.0" wc
2.1" 2.2" 2.6" 2.5" 2.4" 2.8" 1.3" 2.5"
Capacities
S 450 600 720 640 925 1100 1350 1725
(1000's Btu/hr) +2.0" wc
with Natural Gas
T 1.9" 1.6" 2.3" 1.8" 1.7" 2.4" 1.1" 1.9"
A
Pressures ("wc) 510 550 800 1000 1610
T +3.0" wc --- --- ---
I 1.1" 1.3" 1.3" 2.0" 1.6"
C 450 495 750 900 1500
+4.0" wc --- --- ---
S 0.9" 1.1" 1.1" 1.6" 1.4"
475 800 1420
+5.0" wc --- -- - --- --- ---
1.0" 1.3" 1.3"
Minimum Main plus pilot 15 20 37
Capacities
(1000's Btu/hr) Pilot only 10 15 20
Required natural gas differential
3.0 3.5 4.1 4.5 5.2 4.2 7.2
pressure to burner inlet ("wc)
Approximate flame length 1 to 2-1/2 to 1-1/2 to
1/2 to 1 ft. 1/2 to 1 ft. 1 to 2-1/2 ft.
in still air 1-1/2 ft. 3-1/2 ft. 2 ft.

5/93
 Page 2108 Model “400” OVENPAK® Gas Burners

Capacities and Specifications – 60 Hertz

Capacities and Operating Data – Model 425 through 487M

Burner Model 425 432M 435 442M 445 456M 470M 487M

Motor Horsepower: 3/4 3/4 3/4 1 1 1-1/2 2 3

Specification Frame Number: 56 56 56 56 56 143T 145T 182T
-5.0 to 2750 3850 5175 6400 8050 10060
--- ---
-0.5" wc 2.7" 2.2" 3.4" 3.6" 3.7" 4.6"
2500 3200 3500 4150 4500 5600 7000 8700
±0" wc
D 2.2" 3.6" 1.8" 2.5" 2.6" 2.8" 2.8" 3.4"
U 2375 3000 3325 4000 4280 5340 6570 8400
C +1.0" wc
2.0" 3.2" 1.6" 2.4" 2.3" 2.5" 2.5" 3.2"
Maximum T
2250 2800 3150 3800 4125 5200 6300 8200
Capacities +2.0" wc
S 1.8" 2.8" 1.4" 2.1" 2.2" 2.4" 2.3" 3.0"
(1000's Btu/hr)
T 2650 3650 5000 5500 7500
with Natural Gas A +3.0" wc --- --- ---
Pressures ("wc) 2.5" 1.9" 2.2" 1.7" 2.5"
T
I 2500 3500 4600 5000 6200
+4.0" wc --- --- ---
C 2.2" 1.8" 1.9" 1.4" 1.7"
S 2250 3300 4100 4500 5500
+5.0" wc --- --- ---
1.8" 1.6" 1.5" 1.2" 1.4"
3500 5000
+6.0" wc --- --- --- --- --- ---
0.7" 1.1"
Minimum Main plus pilot 60 87 110 125 150 175
Capacities
(1000's Btu/hr) Pilot only 35 45 90 105 115 117
Required natural gas differential
3.6 4.9 3.8 4.9 4.5 5.1 5.2 7.6
pressure to burner inlet ("wc)
Approximate flame length 3-1/2 to
2-1/2 to 3-1/2 ft. 4 to 5 ft. 4 to 6 ft. 5 to 7 ft. 6 to 8 ft. 8 to 10 ft.
in still air 5 ft.
Model “400” OVENPAK® Gas Burners Page 2109

Capacities and Specifications – 50 Hertz

Standard Model “400” OVENPAK® 50 Hz Motor Voltages Available (possible net extra cost)
Burner includes a combustion air blower
Horsepower Type 190-200/1/50 380-415/3/50 500/3/50
with motor.
Maximum capacity of Model “400” Totally
1/3 & 1/2 X X X
Enclosed
OVENPAK® Burner is affected by the static
Totally
pressure within the combustion chamber. 3/4 & 1
Enclosed
X X X
Data shown assumes firing in the open, or Totally
into an airstream with enough oxygen to 1-1/2, 2 & 3 X X X
Enclosed
complete the combustion process. If burner
is fired into an oxygen-starved chamber or
airstream, capacities may be reduced as
much as 25-30%. Do not attempt to
operate beyond the duct static pressure
range shown. For higher back pressure
applications, select from Model “EB” or
“EB-MRV” OVENPAK® Burner options.
All gas pressures are differential
pressures and are measured at the gas
pressure test connection on the backplate
of each OVENPAK® Burner. Differential
pressures shown are approximate.

Capacities and Operating Data - Model 405 through 422M

Burner Model 405 407M 408 408M 412M 413M 415 422M

Motor Horsepower: 1/3 1/2 1/3 3/4 1/2 3/4 1/3 3/4
Specification Frame Number: 48 48 48 56 48 56 48 56
460 735 1375
D -5.0" wc --- --- --- --- ---
U 2.0" 2.4" 1.2"
C 460 735 1375
Maximum T -3.0" wc --- --- --- --- ---
2.0" 2.4" 1.2"
Capacities
S 415 625 670 660 1000 1080 1250 1800
(1000's Btu/hr) T
±0" wc
1.6" 1.7" 2.0" 1.9" 2.0" 2.5" 1.0" 2.0"
with Natural Gas A
Pressures ("wc) T 390 585 630 625 920 990 1190 1670
+1.0" wc
I 1.4" 1.5" 1.7" 1.7" 1.7" 2.4" 0.9" 1.8"
C 920 1440
S +2.0" wc --- --- --- --- --- ---
1.7" 1.3"
Minimum Main plus pilot 15 20 15 20 37
Capacities
(1000's Btu/hr) Pilot only 10 15 20
Required natural gas differential
2.2 2.3 3.0 2.6 3.5 4.1 2.9 5.6
pressure to burner inlet ("wc)
Approximate flame length 1 to 1-1/2 to 2 to
1/2 to 1 ft. 1/2 to 1 ft. 1 to 2 ft.
in still air 1-1/2 ft. 2 ft. 2-1/2 ft.

8/00
 Page 2110 Model “400” OVENPAK® Gas Burners

Capacities and Specifications – 50 Hertz

Capacities and Operating Data - Model 425 through 487M

Burner Model 425 432M 435 442M 445 456M 470M 487M

Motor Horsepower: 3/4 3/4 3/4 1 1 1-1/2 2 3

Specification Frame Number: 56 56 56 56 56 143T 145T 182T
2300 2920 4325 5350 6700 8400
-5.0" wc --- ---
1.9" 1.3" 2.4" 2.5" 2.6" 3.2"
D
U 2300 2920 4325 5350 6700 8400
-3.0" wc --- ---
C 1.9" 1.3" 2.4" 2.5" 2.6" 3.2"
Maximum T
2090 2670 2780 3460 3760 4670 5850 7250
Capacities ±0" wc
S 1.6" 2.5" 1.1" 1.8" 1.8" 1.9" 2.0" 2.3"
(1000's Btu/hr) T
with Natural Gas 1970 2340 3340 4450 5500 7050
A +1.0" wc --- ---
Pressures ("wc) 1.4" 2.0" 1.6" 1.8" 1.7" 2.1"
T
I 3220 4340 5250 6850
C +2.0" wc --- --- --- ---
1.5" 1.7" 1.6" 2.1"
S
6250
+3.0" wc --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
1.7"
Minimum Main plus pilot 60 87 110 125 150 175
Capacities
(1000's Btu/hr) Pilot only 35 45 90 105 115 117
Required natural gas differential
2.5 3.8 2.2 3.8 3.1 3.6 5.0 5.0
pressure to burner inlet ("wc)
Approximate flame length 3 to 3-1/2 to
2 to 3 ft. 4 to 5 ft. 5 to 6 ft. 7 to 8 ft.
in still air 4-1/2 ft. 4 ft.
Model “400” OVENPAK® Gas Burners Page 2111

Capacities and Specifications

External Blower (EB) versions
Combustion and Differential Air Pressure ("wc) 3 4 5 6 8 9 10 11
Cooling Air
required Volume (SCFM) 150 170 190 210 240 255 270 280

Maximum Capacity 460 580 715 780 870 910 960 1000
EB-1 Heat Releases
Minimum & pilot 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60
OVENPAK® (1000's Btu/hr)
Pilot only 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45
Burner
Natural Gas At burner inlet 2.1 3.4 5.1 6.1 7.6 8.3 9.2 10.0
differential
pressures ("wc) At burner gas test connection 2.0 3.1 4.7 5.6 7.0 7.6 8.5 9.2
Flame Lengths In still air 4" to 15" beyond end of discharge sleeve

Combustion and Differential Air Pressure ("wc) 3 4 5 6 8 9 10 11

Cooling Air
required Volume (SCFM) 220 250 280 310 355 375 395 415

Maximum Capacity 750 980 1200 1330 1450 1500 1550 1600
EB-2 Heat Releases
Minimum & pilot 60 60 60 60 70 70 75 80
OVENPAK® (1000's Btu/hr)
Pilot only 25 25 25 25 30 30 35 35
Burner
Natural Gas At burner inlet 3 5.2 7.8 9.5 11.3 12.1 12.9 13.8
differential
pressures ("wc) At burner gas test connection 2.5 4.2 6.3 7.7 9.2 9.8 10.5 11.2
Flame Lengths In still air 12" to 30" beyond end of discharge sleeve

Combustion and Differential Air Pressure ("wc) 3 4 5 6 8 9 10 11

Cooling Air
required Volume (SCFM) 350 405 455 495 575 615 650 675

Maximum Capacity 1620 1900 2120 2320 2670 2840 3000 3150
EB-3 Heat Releases
Minimum & pilot 90 95 105 115 13 0 140 150 155
OVENPAK® (1000's Btu/hr)
Pilot only 45 45 50 55 65 70 75 75
Burner
Natural Gas At burner inlet 4.1 5.6 7.0 8.3 11.0 12.5 13.9 15.4
differential
pressures ("wc) At burner gas test connection 1.6 2.2 2.8 3.3 4.4 5.0 5.6 6.2
Flame Lengths In still air 2 to 3 feet beyond end of discharge sleeve

Combustion and Differential Air Pressure ("wc) 3 4 5 6 8 9 10 11

Cooling Air
required Volume (SCFM) 550 635 710 775 895 950 1000 1050

Maximum Capacity 2320 2800 3230 3500 3950 4150 4330 4600
EB-4 Heat Releases
Minimum & pilot 100 115 130 140 160 170 180 190
OVENPAK® (1000's Btu/hr)
Pilot only 40 40 40 45 50 55 55 60
Burner
Natural Gas At burner inlet 2.5 3.7 4.9 5.8 7.4 8.1 8.8 10.0
differential
pressures ("wc) At burner gas test connection 1.9 2.8 3.7 4.3 5.5 6.1 6.6 7.5
Flame Lengths In still air 2-1/2 to 3-1/2 feet beyond end of discharge sleeve

12/92
 Page 2112 Model “400” OVENPAK® Gas Burners

Capacities and Specifications

External Blower (EB) versions

Combustion and Differential Air Pressure ("wc) 3 4 5 6 8 9 10 11

Cooling Air
required Volume (SCFM) 665 770 860 940 1080 1150 1210 1270

Maximum Capacity 2940 3500 3980 4420 5130 5450 5740 6000
EB-5 Heat Releases
Minimum & pilot 155 180 200 220 255 270 285 300
OVENPAK® (1000's Btu/hr)
Pilot only 25 30 35 35 40 45 50 50
Burner
Natural Gas At burner inlet 2.2 3.1 4.0 4.9 6.6 7.5 8.3 9.1
differential
pressures ("wc) At burner gas test connection 1.3 1.8 2.3 2.9 3.9 4.4 4.8 5.3
Flame Lengths In still air 3 to 5 feet beyond end of discharge sleeve

Combustion and Differential Air Pressure ("wc) 3 5 8 11 16 18 22 24

Cooling Air
required Volume (SCFM) 975 1260 1590 1870 2250 2390 2640 2760

Maximum Capacity 4710 6700 9500 11200 13500 14300 15800 16500
Heat Releases
EB-6 Minimum & pilot 335 390 490 575 695 735 815 850
(1000's Btu/hr)
OVENPAK® Pilot only 100 100 100 115 140 145 165 170
Burner
Natural Gas At burner inlet 2.8 5.6 11.3 15.7 22.8 25.6 31.3 34.1
differential
pressures ("wc) At burner gas test connection 2.0 4.0 8.1 11.2 16.3 18.3 22.3 24.3
3 to 8 feet beyond end of 8 to 12 feet beyond end of
Flame Lengths In still air
discharge sleeve discharge sleeve

Combustion and Differential Air Pressure ("wc) 3 5 8 11 16 18 22 24

Cooling Air
required Volume (SCFM) 975 1260 1590 1870 2250 2390 2640 2760

Maximum Capacity 4710 6700 9500 11200 13500 14300 15800 16500
Heat Releases
EB-7 Minimum & pilot 335 390 490 575 695 735 815 850
(1000's Btu/hr)
OVENPAK® Pilot only 100 100 100 115 140 145 165 170
Burner
Natural Gas At burner inlet 1.8 3.6 7.3 10.1 14.8 16.6 20.2 22.1
differential
pressures ("wc) At burner gas test connection 1.0 2.0 4.1 5.6 8.2 9.2 11.2 12.2
3 to 8 feet beyond end of 8 to 12 feet beyond end of
Flame Lengths In still air
discharge sleeve discharge sleeve
Model “400” OVENPAK® Gas Burners Page 2113

Accessory Options
Air filter assemblies and silencers
dB(A) sound levels Sound Level dB(A)
from actual tests con- Burner
Model Standard with
ducted at full-rated 60 Hz Burner Silencer
capacity are shown in table 405 84 75
at right. Measurement 407M 83 77
point is shown in sketch 408M 84 75
below. (Meter was set to 408 87 78
412M 81 73
A-scale, slow response.) 82
413M 72
Operation on 50 Hz 415 89 77
power results in lower 422M 88 79
rotational speed of blower, 425 89 78
and so reduces air output, 432M 88 80
435 87 78
capacity, and resulting 89
442M 80
noise levels. 50 Hz noise 445 89 81
levels should not exceed 456M 90 83
the above data measured 470M 92 83
on 60 Hz operation. 487M 94 85
Air filter assemblies help to trap airborne particu-
late matter. They are offered with washable replace-
able filter elements or with permanent metallic ele-
ments (as shown in photograph above). Filters mount
onto OVENPAK® Burner's blower housing (or silencer
housing of burners so equipped) and surround the
blower motor and combustion air inlet.

Filter silencers help reduce noise levels. They

mount onto OVENPAK® Burner's blower housing and
enclose the blower motor and combustion air inlet (as
shown in above photograph). They can be furnished
in conjunction with a permanent or replaceable filter
element assembly described above.

6/96
 Page 2114 Model “400” OVENPAK® Gas Burners

Accessory Options
Universal Joint Arrangements (for all Auxiliary Switches
versions except EB-MRV) allow control of as many as Maxon offers 4 types, all cam-actuated by the
5 burners by a single control motor. Torque require- burner main operating shaft. (If Universal Joint
ment is 10 in-lbs for EACH burner driven. Primary Arrangements are used, switch must mount on
burner should drive no more than 2 Secondary furthest left burner.) Field installation MAY require
burners to either side of itself. burner modification per instructions provided in
Miniature universal joints simplify burner alignment. Product Information Sheet 2000-7/8.
Aluminum connecting rod can be cut to fit actual Low Fire Start Switch Assembly (SPDT) opens
burner spacing. (Allowable distance between adjacent the circuit when burner leaves minimum position. Also
burner centerlines is 21" – 33" for 422M and smaller, available in Weatherproof and Hazardous Location/
23.5" – 36" for larger burners.) Weatherproof versions.
High and Low Fire Position Switch Assembly
includes 2 SPDT switches. One switch may be field-
set to activate at high fire position, while other is set to
activate at low fire position. Switch assemblies are
also available in a weatherproof version.

To order, specify:
1. Primary and secondary burners
2. Any other accessories desired
3. Required quantity of Universal Joint Assem-
blies
Low Fire Start Switch shown

Manual Handle Kit permits setting and locking

air and fuel valves at a constant firing rate. See photo Discharge Sleeve Mounting Gaskets
below. Standard discharge sleeve gasket provides
adequate sealing in most applications.
High Back Pressure Gasket Kit includes 2
additional gaskets to provide sealing against back
pressures as shown in sketch below.

Standard With
Arrangement High Back Pressure Kit
Model “400” OVENPAK® Gas Burners Page 2115

Accessory Options
Hi/Lo Control Motor Sets for high or low firing. Discharge Sleeves are available in 3 versions:
Optional set includes 2-position unidirectional 11- – Standard sleeve is 8" long, made of #310 SS, and
second 120v 50/60 Hz motor and connecting base is suitable for downstream temperatures up to
with mounting linkage. See table below for dimen- 1000°F (538°C).
sions which differ from standard burner.
– For higher velocities, specify 12" long sleeve
made of #310 SS for downstream temperatures up
to 1000°F (538°C).
– For higher downstream temperatures between
1000°F (538°C) and 1500°F (816°C), specify 8"
long, #RA 330 SS sleeve.

Dimensions in Inches
Burner Model
P R T
EB-1, 2 405 - 413M 10.25 17.63 7.75
EB-3 415 - 422M 10.19 17.56 7.75
EB-4, 5 425 to 442M 11.69 19.06 8.75
EB-6, 7 445 - 487M 16.69 24.06 8.75

9/94
 Page 2116 Model “400” OVENPAK® Gas Burners

Dimensions (in Inches)

Model “400” and “400-MA” OVENPAK® Burners

NOTE: Use of auxiliary switches will add to dimension D.

Model A B* C D E F G H J K L M N CC DD EE FF GG HH JJ KK
405 8.81 11.37 14 3.66 17.81 14.37 17.06
17.31
407M 15.25 15.87 18 4.69 19.69 21.69 18.62
408 8.81 11.37 14 3.66 19.12 17.81 14.37 17.06
3.75 1 6.62 8.87 10.30 8.44 6.31 8.44 3.62
408M
5.44 13.19 4.37 0.25 17.31
412M 15.25 15.87 18 4.69 19.69 21.69 18.62
413M 19.12
415 8.81 11.37 14 17.75 14.37 17.06
4.75 1-1/4 7.69 8.81 10.25 10.37 8.25 10.37 4.44 3.59 17.31
422M 15.25 15.87 19.56 21.69 18.62
425 1-1/2 12.12 14.44 3.94 20.5 20.25 19.75
432M 15.25 15.87 2.81 21.25 23.56 29.62
5.75 10.06 11.88 14.69 12.50 5.44 10.25 12.5 5.62 18.25
435 12.12 14.44 18 3.94 20.5 20.25 19.75
442M 2 2.81 21.25 23.56
6.06 8.62 0.37
445 15.25 15.87 22.5
25 23.5
456M 29.62
6.81 14.38 16.88 19.31 14.62 6.5 12.25 14.75 6.69 5.37
470M 24
3 17.75 17.79 19 26.81 25.94
487M
*Main fuel gas inlet NPT

Pipe threads on this page conform to NPT (ANSI Standard B2.1)

Model “400” OVENPAK® Gas Burners Page 2117

Dimensions ( in Inches)
Model EB, EB-MA, and EB-MRV OVENPAK® Burners

NOTE: Use of auxiliary switches will add to dimension D.

Model A B C D E F G H J K L M N U V W X Y AA BB
EB-1
3.75 6.62 8.44 6.31 8.44 3.62 5.44
EB-2 1-1/4 5.44 8.87 10.31 13.19 4.37 0.25 7.25 8.62 6.37 0.44 5.44 4
EB-3 4.75 7.69 10.37 8.25 10.37 4.44 5.38
EB-4
2 10.06 11.88 14.69 12.5 5.44 10.25 12.5 5.62 9.25 10.62 8.87 7.75 6 6
EB-5
5.75 6.06 8.62 0.37 0.56
EB-6
3 14.38 16.88 19.31 14.62 6.5 12.25 14.75 6.69 9.62 11.12 11.75 10.25 8.5 8
EB-7

Pipe threads on this page conform to NPT (ANSI Standard B2.1)

1/98
 Page 2118 Model “400” OVENPAK® Gas Burners

Accessory Dimensions (in Inches)

Filter with silencer for Model “400” OVENPAK® Burner

Model JJ LL MM NN PP RR SS TT UU
405 14.4 12.4 19.3 10.4 23.2 29.9 33.6
407M 21.7 15.1 21.9 7.8 24.7 31.4 35.1
408 14.4 12.4 19.3 10.4 23.2 29.9 33.6
23.2
408M
412M 21.7 15.1 16 21.9 7.8 24.7 31.4 35.1
413M
415 14.4 12.4 19.3 10.4 23.2 29.9 33.6
23.1
422M 21.7 15.1 7.8 24.7 31.4 35.1
21.9
425 20.2 14.5 8.3 24 25.9 32.6 36.3
432M 23.6 18.1 22 24.9 10.8 24.9 31.9 38.5 42.3
435 20.25 14.5 16 21.4 8.3 24 25.9 32.6 36.3
442M 23.6 24.9
445 18.1 22 24.9 10.8 31.9 38.5 42.3
23.5 28.6
456M
470M
25.9 20.2 24 29.2 12.8 29.6 33.9 42.7 44.3
487M

Pipe threads on this page conform to NPT (ANSI Standard B2.1)

Model “400” OVENPAK® Gas Burners Page 2119

Component Identification

Suggested spare parts Nameplate

– Spark Ignitor – Discharge Sleeve and Gasket
– Flame Rod, if used – Motor
– Filter Elements, if used – Impeller
– Mixing Cone – Gas/Air Valve Linkage Kit
To order parts for an existing OVENPAK® Burner assembly, list:
1. Name(s) of part(s) from above illustration
2. Quantity of each required
3. OVENPAK® Burner nameplate information:
• size and model number of burner
• assembly number
• date of manufacture
• if available, serial number of Maxon fuel shut-off valve in-line to OVENPAK®
Burner (This serial number is on Maxon valve's nameplate.)

2/96
 Page 2120 Model “400” OVENPAK® Gas Burners

Suggested Maintenance/Inspection Procedures

Discharge sleeve and cone alignment Flame Rod
Centering of the mixing cone provides a small
annular opening for the flow of some cooling combus-
tion air along the discharge sleeve wall. We SUG-
GEST periodic inspection from the discharge side of
the burner to assure that this alignment is maintained.
Caution: Tightening can lead to cone distortion
and greatly reduce cone and discharge sleeve
life. Cone should be free to move and allow for
thermal expansion. NOTE: 1/2" x 1" adapter bushing supplied by others
If re-adjustment is necessary, back out the four
lock nuts and re-center mixing cone with adjusting Table 1: Flame rod and spark ignitor dimensions
screws handtight. Back each screw out one-half turn for all Model “400” OVENPAK® Burners
before re-locking. This allows for thermal expansion manufactured after 1/1/91 ➀
as cone gets hot.
Filters should be inspected regularly and cleaned, Spark Ignitor Flame Rod
using a vacuum to remove loose/dry accumulations, Burner Model Dimensions Dimensions
then washing and/or degreasing as appropriate for X Y X Y Z
the filter type used. 405

To replace flame rod or spark ignitor: 407M

1. Check Table 1 at right for dimension “Y” and cut 408M
EB-1
tip to length shown. 1.3 .4
EB-2 408
2. Insert 1/2" NPT collar into burner and snug into .4 6 2.9
position. 412M
3. Insert insulator through collar into burner. 413M
4. Check table for dimension “X”, position accord-
415
ingly, and tighten locking bushing until insulator is EB-3 1.5 .4
held firmly. 422M
425
WARNING: Over-tightening locking bushing
may damage insulator. EB-4 432M
1.2 .4 .8 8 3.5
EB-5 435
NOTE: A full-wave 6000 volt spark ignition trans-
442M
former is suggested for use with Maxon burner
equipment. 445

EB-6 456M
1.3 .4 .4 12.8 2.9
EB-7 470M
487M

➀ Manufactured date is stamped on metal nameplate

of Model “400” OVENPAK® Burner. For specifics
relative to units manufactured prior to 1/1/91, see
Product Information Sheet 2100-3.
Model “400” OVENPAK® Gas Burners Page 2121

Maxon Pre-Assembled Package

Model “400” OVENPAK® Gas Burner System

425 OVENPAK®
package system
installed and mounted
onto a Maxon
pre-fabricated
heater/duct section

Save time and reduce your installation costs with a All pre-assembled package systems include a
completely assembled and pre-wired burner and pipe Model “400” OVENPAK® Burner and pipe train. The
train “package”. pipe trains are available with “General Purpose” or
All system components have been carefully “Block and Bleed” arrangement options.
selected to match the high performance characteris- Additional application flexibility is provided with five
tics of the Model “400” OVENPAK® Gas Burner. different sized systems, all with 40:1 turndown
The compact design of this “packaged system” capacity ranges.
makes mounting to your duct fast and easy. Connect Packaged OVENPAK® Burner systems may also
to the gas line and bring in electricity. It's wired and be mounted in a pre-fabricated combustion heater/
piped, ready to go. duct section by Maxon. This option is value-
engineered to give you the most for your dollar spent.

11/92
 Page 2122 Model “400” OVENPAK® Gas Burners

Design / Application Summary

Five Model "400" OVENPAK® pre-assembled package options:

OVENPAK® Burner Model > 405 408 415 425 435

Horsepower 1/3 3/4
Totally Enclosed Blower Motor
Frame Number 48 56
Maximum Capacity (Btu/hr) 500,000 800,000 1,500,000 2,500,000 3,500,000
Minimum Capacity (Btu/hr) main plus pilot 15,000 20,000 37,000 60,000 87,000
Minimum natural gas pressure required at pipe train inlet 6" wc 10" wc 9" wc 14" wc
Inlet pipe train size NPT 1-1/4" 1-1/2"
Approximate overall envelope dimensions 42" long x 40" high x 24" wide

Pre-assembled pipe train “package” Factory pre-wiring includes the following

includes the following components for natural gas: components for 120 volts 60 hertz AC:
– Burner gas shut-off cock – Low fire start switch
– Main inlet gas shut-off cock – Combustion air pressure switch
– Pilot gas train consisting of: – Combination high and low gas pressure switch
• Pilot gas shut-off cock – Pilot gas solenoid valve
• Pilot gas pressure regulator (maximum 1 PSIG – Normally-open vent solenoid valve (when used)
natural gas inlet pressure) – Spark ignition transformer
• Pilot gas solenoid valve, 120/60 AC – Maxon “main” and/or “blocking” gas shut-off
– Main gas pressure regulator (maximum 1 PSIG valve(s)
natural gas inlet pressure) – NEMA type 12 and 13 junction box with terminal
– Combustion air pressure switch, automatic reset, wiring strip
NEMA 1, 120/60 AC Field wiring is required:
– Combination high and low gas pressure switch,
– To the packaged system's junction box wiring strip
manual reset, NEMA 1, 120/60 AC
– To the Model “400” OVENPAK® Burner's combus-
– Spark ignition transformer, 6000 volts, NEMA 1,
tion air blower motor
120/60 AC
– Between your flame safeguard relay and the
– NEMA type 12 and 13 junction box with terminal
OVENPAK® Burner's flame sensor
wiring strip
NOTE: A flame rod may be furnished by Maxon; UV
– Normally open vent solenoid valve, 120/60 AC,
detector is a part of the control package when
(“Block and Bleed” arrangements only)
supplied by Maxon or may be supplied by others.
The following items are ordered and invoiced – Other field wiring connections may be required if
separately, but installed onto the “packaged” pipe your control circuit includes high/low temperature
train assembly: limits, automatic temperature controller, and/or
– Maxon Model “400” OVENPAK® Burner assembly other miscellaneous safety limit switches.
– Connecting base and linkage assembly to adapt
customer supplied automatic control motor
– Low fire start switch (mounted to OVENPAK®
Burner)
– Maxon main gas shut-off valve, position “L”, 120/60
AC
– Maxon main gas “blocking” shut-off valve, position
“L”, 120/60 AC (“Block and Bleed” arrangements
only)
– Air filter assembly
Model “400” OVENPAK® Gas Burners Page 2123

Maxon Packaged Heater/Duct Sections

Reduce your fabrication time with a complete Application flexibility is offered by three sizes of
combustion heater/duct including the prewired and ducts. All sizes can be fabricated to have return/inlet
prepiped Model “400” OVENPAK® Burner system opening at any 90° increment position (viewing from
package. the back of the OVENPAK® Burner). Continuous
Easy installation is provided by flanged duct welds on all joint seals permit duct section installation
connection joints. Burner is mounted to a .312" mild on pressure-side or suction-side applications.
steel wall, lined with 6" thick fiber insulation. The other
16 gauge aluminized steel heater/duct walls are ready
for your insulation.

Approximate duct section dimensions (in inches)

Model A B (inside) C D (inside) E F G H J (inside) K
405 - 408 12 24 5 10 36 48 12.62 26.62 7.5 37
415 15 30 6 12 42 60 14.62 32.62 9.5 48
425 - 435 18 36 8 16 48 72 18.62 38.62 11.5 58

7/94
 Page 2124 Model “400” OVENPAK® Gas Burners

Maxon Packaged Heater/Duct Sections

Design and Application Details
Maximum discharge temperature 600°F (316°C)
Duct static pressures may range between +2" wc and -5" wc
Optimum design parameters permit up to 3000 feet per minute air velocity through return/inlet duct.

Recommended maximum discharge air volumes

Model "400" OVENPAK® Burner 405 408 415 425 435
Maximum discharge air volume in SCFM 5000 7500 12,000

To select your packaged system, specify:

1. Quantity ________

2. Model “400” OVENPAK® Gas Burner Assembly _________, for natural gas
– Arranged for UV detector, or with flame rod
– Furnished with blower motor for ___________ AC
– With low fire start switch _________ , General Purpose, 120/60 AC
– With combustion air filter assembly ____________ (optional)
– With connecting base and linkage assembly ____________ to adapt customer's automatic electric
control motor. Specify/select which one of these electric operators will be used:
– Barber-Colman #EA51–58, also with prefix MC, MP or MF
– Honeywell #M644, #M744, #M941, or #M944
– Penn/Johnson #M-80 or #M81

3. Arranged into pre-assembled and wired pipe train package, 120/60 AC,
– With Block and Bleed arrangement assembly ______________, or
– With General Purpose arrangement assembly _______________ .

4. With _______ 1-1/4" or 1-1/2" Maxon Series __________ Automatic Reset, Manual Reset
Shut-Off Valve(s), for natural gas, in top assembly position “L” for 120/60 AC
– With electrical terminal block (option)
– With 6 second, or 14 second opening time (automatic reset valve(s) only)
– With ______________ auxiliary signal switch(es) (optional)
NOTE: For Block and Bleed arrangement, specify which switch(es) go in main valve and which
switch(es) in blocking valve, if different.

5. With heater/duct section assembly ____________ (optional)

with return/inlet duct positioned on top, right, bottom, or left
Model “200” OVENPAK® Gas Burners Page 2125

Model “200” OVENPAK® Burners

Model “200” OVENPAK® Gas Burners
provide a broad range of heat without a
combustion blower by firing through-the-wall
into your combustion chamber on the suction
side of the circulating fan. An internal mixing
cone blends air drawn through the burner (by
chamber suction) with fuel gas delivered
through its central gas nozzle. The Model
“200” OVENPAK® Burner is designed for
applications involving suction-side firing from
-0.2" to -1.6" wc static chamber conditions.
They provide:
– low initial and operating cost
– easy installation
Model “200” OVENPAK®
Burner arranged with air inlet – simple adjustment
guard and optional UV scanner – heavy duty cast iron construction in a
compact burner configuration

Performance data
NOTE: Maximum capacity varies with the range of suction provided at operating temperature

Maximum capacities (1000's Btu/hr) with corresponding fuel gas differential

Performance data
pressures at specific combustion chamber static pressure conditions
Combustion chamber suction ("wc) -0.2 -0.3 -0.4 -0.5 -0.6 -0.7 -0.8 -0.9 -1.0 -1.6
Maximum capacity (1000's Btu/hr) 100 190 275 360 450 540 625 700 800 1000
Minimum capacity (1000's Btu/hr) 10 12 13 14 15 17 18 19 20 25
Combustion air volume required (SCFM) 65 80 90 95 110 120 130 135 145 184
Natural gas differential pressure required ("wc) 0.1 0.4 0.7 1.2 1.9 2.7 3.7 4.6 6.0 9.4
Propane gas differential pressure required ("wc) --- --- 0.3 0.5 0.8 1.1 1.5 1.8 2.4 3.8
Approximate flame lengths beyond end of
0-3 6-9 12 - 18 15 - 21 18 - 24 21 - 27 24 - 30 24 - 26
discharge sleeve (inches)

Air volumes shown are for burners without Typical pipe train
damper, or with damper in full-open position. If
damper is used to restrict air flow, maximum capacity
will be similarly reduced.
Pilot flame issues from the same gas ports as
main flame, so proof of pilot gas ignition assures
ignition of main gas supply.
Flame sensing can be either by flame rod or UV
scanner when natural gas is the fuel, but only with UV
scanner if propane is the fuel.
Installation is simple, utilizing the built-in, direct-
mounting flange provided.
A complete combustion system utilizing Model
“200” OVENPAK® Burners also includes gas train,
fuel-throttling valve and control system. Your Maxon
representative can help you choose from the broad
range of options available.

12/89
 Page 2126 Model “200” OVENPAK® Gas Burners

Design and Application Details

Differential gas pressures in inches water column Suction (shown in inches wc) should be that
(" wc) for both natural gas and propane are those that available at operating temperature. It can be deter-
should be measured by connecting a manometer mined by a two-step procedure: First, measure cold
between test points shown in the photo below. suction (chamber to atmosphere). Second, multiply
that reading by the correction factor shown in Graph
"A" for your desired operating temperature.

Model “208” OVENPAK® Burner shown with air damper and

flame rod For example, if you anticipate running the system at 600ºF,
follow that dotted line to the right until it intersects curve,
then read downward to a correction factor of 0.5. Therefore,
if you read a cold suction of 1" wc, your expected suction “at
temperature” would be 1" x 0.5 = 0.5" wc.

Dimensions (in inches)

Burner
Assembly

Flame Rod Assembly

 ALLEGATO
BEILIEGEND FG 01
ANNEXED

Mod.
FILTRO PER GAS
706..
GAS FILTER 706.. F

DIMENSIONI DI INGOMBRO (mm)

OVERALL DIMENSIONS (mm)

MOD. A B C D E H L
70611/CE Rp 1/2" 92 - - - 37 120
70612/CE Rp 3/4" 92 - - - 37 120
70602/CE Rp 1" 103 - - - 50 160
70604/CE Rp 1"1/4 103 - - - 50 160
70603/CE Rp 1"1/2 103 - - - 50 160

Omologazione UNI-EN 126 70631/CE Rp 2" 140 - - - 73 186

UNI-EN 126 approved 70603F/CE DN 40 - 110 18 150 60 200
70631F/CE DN 50 - 125 18 165 70 230
70610F/CE DN 65 - 145 18 185 91 290
70620F/CE DN 80 - 160 18 200 106 320
In conformità alla Direttiva 97/23/CE
According to the 97/23/CE regulation 70640F/CE DN 100 - 180 18 220 126 380
70660F/CE DN 150 - 240 22 288 151 450
Previsto per articolo DN150.
Forseen for the DN150 model.

DATI TECNICI TECHNICAL DATA

Attacchi filettati: ……………..…………...……...Rp UNI-ISO 7/1 Threaded connections: ….……………...…….. Rp UNI-ISO 7/1
Attacchi flangiati: …………………….....….ISO 7005/2 - Pn 16 Flanged connections: …………………...… ISO 7005/2 - Pn 16
Pressione d'entrata Pmax. Maximun inlet pressure:
- filtri filettati: ……………….. 1 bar (pressione di collaudo 2 bar) - threaded filters: ………………… 1 bar (testing pressure 2 bar)
- filtri flangiati: ……………… 4 bar (pressione di collaudo 6 bar) - flanged filters: ………………….. 4 bar (testing pressure 6 bar)
Grado di filtrazione: …………………………...…….….. ≤ 50 µm Filtration degree: ……………………...………………… ≤ 50 µm
Temperatura d'impiego: …………….……….…… -10°C +80°C Working temperature: …………………...…..……. -10°C +80°C
Resistenza meccanica: ..………. secondo Norme UNI-EN 161 Mechanical strength: ………....in compliance with UNI-EN 161
Materiali: corpo e coperchi in alluminio; elemento filtrante con Materials: body and covers in aluminium. Filter element with
due pannelli in Viledon P15/500S omologato secondo le norme two long-life Viledon P15/500S panels with remarkable dust
DIN EN779, di lunga durata e con notevole assorbimento di absorption in according to DIN EN779 specifications; cage for
polvere; gabbietta per i filtri filettati in materiale sintetico, per i threaded filters in synthetic material; galvanized steel
filtri flangiati rinforzi in acciaio zincato. reinforcements for flanged filters.
Combustibili: gas delle tre famiglie: gas manifatturati (gas Fuels: gas of the following groups: manufactured gases (town
città); gas naturali (gruppo H - metano); gas di petrolio liquefatto gas); natural gases (group H - methane); liquid petrol gas (lpg);
(gpl); gas non aggressivi. non aggressive gases.
Caratteristiche costruttive: tutti i filtri flangiati sono provvisti di Construction: all flanged filters are fitted with connections for
raccordi per prese di pressione in entrata e in uscita. inlet or outlet pressure taps.
INSTALLAZIONE INSTALLATION
Verificare che il filtro sia idoneo all’uso previsto e che tutti i dati Check that the filter suits the proper use and that all technical
tecnici non siano superati. data are not exceeded.
Non installare il filtro a contatto con pareti intonacate. Do not install the filter on plastered walls.
Per il montaggio utilizzare appositi attrezzi ed agire sui mozzi To install the filter use suitable tools and operate on the
della filettatura. threading hubs.
Montare il filtro in modo tale che il coperchio sia in posizione Assemble the filter in such a way that the cover can be easily
comoda per eventuali ispezioni o pulizie. removed for inspection or cleaning.
Fare attenzione che la direzione del flusso del gas sia quella Ensure that the gas flow direction is that indicated on the filter.
indicata sul filtro stesso. It can be assembled both on horizontal and vertical piping.
Si può installare sia su tubazioni orizzontali che verticali. MAINTENANCE
MANUTENZIONE Change the filter element when ∆p between the pressure taps
Cambiare l’elemento filtrante se il ∆p fra i raccordi delle prese di connections exceeds 10 mbar; anyway it is recommended to
pressione è maggiore di 10 mbar; in ogni caso si consiglia di replace the filter element at least once a year.
cambiare l’elemento filtrante almeno una volta all’anno. To replace the filter element you need to:
Per la sostituzione dell’elemento filtrante occorre: 1. cut off the gas flow by closing the cut off cock;
1. interrompere l’afflusso del gas chiudendo il rubinetto di 2. unscrew the screws and remove the cover;
intercettazione; 3. remove the filter element and clean the filter housing
2. svitare le viti e togliere il coperchio; carefully;
3. togliere l’elemento filtrante e pulire accuratamente il vano 4. replace the old filter element with a new one;
del filtro; 5. reassemble the filter cover ensuring that the guides inside
4. sostituire l’elemento filtrante con uno nuovo; the cover are aligned with the filter element and then tight
5. inserire il coperchio del filtro in modo che le guide all’interno the screws again;
del coperchio stesso siano allineate con l’elemento filtrante, 6. check for any gas leak from the filter cover.
quindi avvitare le viti;
6. controllare che non vi siano perdite di gas dal coperchio del
filtro.

DIAGRAMMA PORTATE / PERDITE DI CARICO

DIAGRAM OF FLOW RATES / PRESSURE DROPS

DN100
DN150
DN40

DN50

DN65

DN80
1"1/4

1"1/2
1/2"

3/4"

1"

2"
20

15

10
∆p (mbar)

0,7

0,5

0,4

0,3

0,2

Metano - Methane dv: 0,62 0,1

1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70 100 200 300 500 1000

Gas città - Town gas dv: 0,45

1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 40 50 70 100 200 300 500 1000

Aria - Air dv: 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 20 30 40 50 70 100 200 300 500 1000

G.P.L. - L.P.G. dv: 1,56 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 20 30 40 50 70 100 200 300 500 1000

3
Q (m /h)
Ediz. 03/02-A (K0050)
GIULIANI ANELLO S.r.l.
44042 CENTO (Ferrara – Italy) Via F.lli Bandiera, 8
Tel. (+39) 051901124 (4 linee r.a.) – Fax (+39) 051901405
Sito Web: www.giulianianello.it – Email: [email protected]
 3.1.4 Edition 5.02
D GB F NL I E

Motorventile VK Motorised valves VK Vannes motorisées VK Motorklep VK Valvole motorizzate VK Válvulas motorizadas VK
zum Sichern, Regeln und for safeguarding, regulat- pour la protection, la voor het beveiligen; per la sicurezza, il para la protección,
Steuern von Luft- oder ing and controlling air or régulation et la com- regelen en besturen van regolamento ed il control- regulación y control de
Gas-Verbrauchseinrich- gas-using equipment mande d’équipements lucht- of gasverbruiksin- lo per impianti di consumo dispositivos de consumo
tungen Motorised valves with de consommation d’air richtingen ad aria ed a gas de aire o gas
Motorventile mit piston drive VK, VK..H ou de gaz Motorklep Valvole motorizzate Válvulas motorizadas de
Kolbenantrieb one-stage Vannes à servomoteur à VK, VK..H 1e trap azionate da pistone accionamiento por
VK, VK..H einstufig VK..S, VK..HS one-stage entraînement par piston VK, VK..H ad uno stadio émbolo
VK..S, VK..HS 1e trap
VK..S, VK..HS einstufig with CPI (closed position VK, VK..H 1 étage met eindschakelaar VK..S, VK..HS ad uno VK, VK..H de una etapa
mit Meldeschalter indication) VK..S, VK..HS 1 étage stadio con indicatore di VK..S, VK..HS de una
VK..Z..S 2e trap
VK..Z..S zweistufig VK..Z..S two-stage avec indicateur de met eindschakelaar posizione etapa con indicador de
mit Meldeschalter with CPI position VK..Z..S a due stadi con posición
voor aardgas, stadsgas,
für Erdgas, Stadtgas, for natural gas, town VK..Z..S 2 étages biogas, LPG en lucht indicatore di posizione VK..Z..S de dos etapas
Biogas, Flüssiggas und gas, biologically pro- avec indicateur de per gas naturale, gas di con indicador de posición
Luft duced methane, LPG position città, biogas, gas liquido para gas natural, gas
and air pour le gaz naturel, le ed aria ciudad, biogás, GLP y
gaz de ville, le biogaz, le aire
GPL et l’air

Betriebsanleitung Operating instructions Instructions de service Bedieningsvoorschrift Istruzioni d’uso Instrucciones de

Bitte lesen und aufbewahren
Please read and keep in a
A lire attentivement et à
Lezen en goed bewaren a. u. b.
Si prega di leggere e utilización
safe place conserver conservare
Se ruega que las lean y
conserven

Einbauen Installation Montage Inbouwen Instalación

Verdrahten Wiring Câblage Bedraden Montaggio Cableado
Einstellen Adjusting Réglage Instellen Cablaggio Ajuste
Wartung Maintaining Entretien Onderhoudswerkzaamheden Regolazione Mantenimiento
Nur durch autorisiertes Fach- By authorised trained personnel Seulement par un spécialiste Alleen door geautoriseerd Manutenzione ¡Sólo por una persona formada
personal! only! formé et autorisé ! vakpersoneel! Solo dall’esperto autorizzato! y autorizada!
WARNUNG! Unsachgemäßer Ein- WARNING! Incorrect installation, ATTENTION ! Un montage, un WAARSCHUWING! Ondeskundi- ATTENZIONE! Se montaggio, re- ¡ADVERTENCIA! La instalación,
bau, Einstellung, Veränderung, Be- adjustment, modification, opera- réglage, une modification, une utili- ge inbouw, instelling, wijziging, be- golazione, modifica, utilizzo o ma- ajuste, modificación, manejo o
dienung oder Wartung kann Ver- tion or maintenance may cause in- sation ou un entretien inadaptés diening of onderhoudswerkzaam- nutenzione non vengono eseguiti mantenimiento incorrecto puede
letzungen oder Sachschäden jury or material damage. risquent d’engendrer des domma- heden kunnen persoonlijk letsel of correttamente, possono verificarsi ocasionar daños personales o ma-
verursachen. Read the instructions before use. ges matériels ou corporels. materiële schade veroorzaken. infortuni o danni. teriales.
Anleitung vor dem Gebrauch le- This unit must be installed in ac- Lire les instructions avant utilisa- Aanwijzingen voor het gebruik le- Si prega di leggere le istruzioni pri- Leer las instrucciones antes de
sen. Dieses Gerät muss nach den cordance with the regulations in tion. Cet appareil doit être installé zen. Dit apparaat moet overeen- ma di utilizzare l’impianto che do- usar. Este aparato debe ser insta-
geltenden Vorschriften installiert force. en respectant les règlements en vi- komstig de geldende regels wor- vrà venire installato in base alle lado observando las normativas en
werden. gueur. den geïnstalleerd. normative vigenti. vigor.

Konformitäts- Certificate of conformity Attestation de Certificaat van Dichiarazione di Certificado de

bescheinigung We, the manufacturer, hereby de- conformité overeenstemming conformità conformidad
Wir erklären als Hersteller, dass die clare that the products VK, marked En tant que fabricant, nous décla- Wij verklaren als fabrikant dat de Dichiariamo in qualità di produttori Nosotros, el fabricante, declaramos
Produkte VK, gekennzeichnet mit with product ID No. CE 0063BL1552, rons que les produits VK, identifiés producten VK, gemerkt met het che i prodotti VK, contrassegnati que los productos VK, marcados
der Produkt-ID-Nr. CE 0063BL1552, comply with the essential require- par le numéro de produit CE product-identificatienummer CE con il numero di identificazione pro- con el n˚ de identificación de pro-
die grundlegenden Anforderungen ments of the following Directives: 0063BL1552, répondent aux exi- 0063BL1552, aan de fundamentele dotto CE 0063BL1552, rispondono ducto CE 0063BL1552, cumplen
folgender Richtlinien erfüllen: D-49018 Osnabrück, Germany – 90/396/EEC in conjunction with gences essentielles des directives voorschriften van de volgende richt- ai requisiti essenziali posti dalle se- con los requisitos básicos de las si-
– 90/396/EWG in Verbindung mit EN 161, suivantes : lijnen voldoen: guenti direttive: guientes directivas:
EN 161, VK – 73/23/EEC in conjunction with – 90/396/CEE en association avec – 90/396/EEG in combinatie met – 90/396/CEE in unione con EN – 90/396/CEE en conexión con la
– 73/23/EWG in Verbindung mit the relevant standards, EN 161, EN 161, 161, norma EN 161,
den einschlägigen Normen, CE-0063BL1552 – 89/336/EEC. – 73/23/CEE en association avec – 73/23/EEG in combinatie met de – 73/23/CEE in unione con le nor- – 73/23/CEE en conexión con las
– 89/336/EWG. The relevant products correspond to les normes pertinentes, toepasselijke normen, me pertinenti, normas pertinentes,
Die entsprechend bezeichneten the types tested by the notified body – 89/336/CEE. – 89/336/EEG. – 89/336/CEE. – 89/336/CEE.
Produkte stimmen überein mit den 0063. Les produits désignés en consé- De overeenkomstig geïdentificeerde I prodotti con tale contrassegno cor- Los productos denominados de la forma
bei der zugelassenen Stelle 0063 quence sont conformes aux types producten komen overeen met de rispondono ai tipi esaminati dall’or- arriba mencionada son conformes con los
geprüften Baumustern. éprouvés à l’organisme notifié 0063. door de aangewezen instantie 0063 ganismo notificato 0063. modelos de construcción ensayados por
gecontroleerde typen. el respectivo Organismo Notificado 0063.

-1-
Eine umfassende Qualitätssicherung Comprehensive quality assurance is Une assurance de la qualité com- Een uitgebreide kwaliteitsborging La totale sicurezza della qualità è ga- El exhaustivo control de calidad está
ist gewährleistet durch ein zertifizier- guaranteed by a certified Quality plète est garantie par un système wordt gegarandeerd door een ge- rantita da un sistema certificato di garantizado por un sistema de ges-
tes Qualitätsmanagementsystem System pursuant to DIN EN ISO qualité certifié selon DIN NE ISO certificeerd kwaliteitsborgingssys- management della qualità ai sensi tión de calidad, certificado conforme
nach DIN EN ISO 9001 gemäß An- 9001 according to annex II, para- 9001, conformément à l’annexe II, teem conform DIN EN ISO 9001, della DIN EN ISO 9001, in base a la norma DIN EN ISO 9001 según
hang II Absatz 3 der Richtlinie graph 3 of Directive 90/396/EEC. paragraphe 3 de la directive overeenkomstig bijlage II, lid 3 van all’appendice II, comma 3 della di- el Anexo II, Párrafo 3 de la Directiva
90/396/EWG. G. Kromschröder AG 90/396/CEE. de richtlijn 90/396/EEG. rettiva 90/396/CEE. 90/396/CEE.
G. Kromschröder AG Osnabrück G. Kromschröder AG G. Kromschröder AG G. Kromschröder AG G. Kromschröder AG
Osnabrück Osnabrück Osnabrück Osnabrück Osnabrück

Eingangsdruck, Netzspannung, Inlet pressure, mains voltage, electri- Pression d’entrée, tension du sec- Inlaatdruk, netspanning, elektrisch Per pressione d’ingresso, tensione Para la presión de entrada, la ten-
elektrische Leistung, Umgebung- cal power rating, ambient tempera- teur, puissance électrique, tempéra- vermogen, omgevingstemperatuur, di rete, potenza elettrica, temperatu- sión de red, conexión eléctrica, tem-
stemperartur, Schutzart und Einbau- ture, enclosure and fitting position – ture ambiante, indice de protection beschermingsklasse en inbouw- ra ambiente, tipo di protezione e po- peratura ambiente, clase de protec-
lage – siehe Typenschild. see type label. et position de montage – voir la positie – zie typeplaatje. sizione di montaggio si rimanda alla ción y posición de montaje – véase
Einschaltdauer ED = 100 %. Duty cycle = 100%. plaque signalétique. Inschakelduur = 100%. targhetta dati. placa de características.
Maximaler Gegendruck bei at- The max. reverse flow pressure with Facteur de marche F. M. = 100%. Maximale tegendruk bij atmosferi- Tempo d’inserzione = 100%. Ciclo de operación: 100 %.
mosphärischem Eingangsdruck: atmospheric inlet pressure is Contre-pression maximale opposée sche inlaatdruk: 150 mbar. Contropressione massima con pres- Contrapresión máxima para presión
150 mbar. 150 mbar. à la pression d’entrée : 150 mbars. Belasting van de eindschakelaar: sione d’ingresso atmosferica: de entrada atmosférica: 150 mbar.
Belastung des Meldeschalters: Loading of the cpi (if present) = Charge maximale à laquelle est as- max. 10 A, 60 tot 250 V~. 150 mbar. Poder de corte del indicador de po-
max. 10 A, 60 bis 250 V~. max. 10 A, 60-250 V AC. sujetti l’indicateur de position : 10 A, Sluittijd: 0,8 s bij veiligheidsuitscha- Portata dell’indicatore di posizione: sición:
Schließzeit: 0,8 s bei Sicherheitsab- Closing time: 0.8 s with safety shut- 60 à 250 V~. keling. 10 A max., da 60 a 250 V~. máx. 10 A, de 60 a 250 V ca.
schaltung. down. Temps de fermeture : 0,8 s en cas Teruglooptijd van 2e trap naar 1e Tempo di chiusura: 0,8 s in caso di Tiempo de cierre: 0,8 s con inter-
Rücklaufzeit von Stufe 2 auf Stufe 1: Return time from stage 2 to stage 1: de mise en sécurité. trap: afhankelijk van de ingestelde interruzione di sicurezza del circuito. ruptor de seguridad.
abhängig vom eingestellten Hub, bis depending on the lift adjustment up Temps de rappel de l’étage 2 à slag tot ca. 5 s. Tempo di ritorno da secondo a pri- Tiempo de retorno de la etapa se-
ca. 5 s. to approx. 5 s. l’étage 1 : mo stadio: fino a ca. 5 s, a seconda gunda a la etapa primera: depen-
jusqu’à environ 5 s, en fonction de la Openingstijd bij VK..A, VK..G, della regolazione. diente de la carrera ajustada, hasta
Öffnungszeit bei Opening time on VK..A, VK..G, course réglée. VK..XG: unos 5 seg.
VK..A, VK..G, VK..XG: VK..XG: ca. 5 s bij DN 40 Tempo di apertura per VK..A,
ca. 5s bei DN 40 approx. 5s for DN 40 Temps d’ouverture pour VK..A, ca. 8 s bij DN 50-65 VK..G, VK..XG: Tiempo de abertura de VK..A, VK..G,
ca. 8s bei DN 50-65 approx. 8s for DN 50-65 VK..G, VK..XG : ca. 10 s bij DN 80-100 ca. 5 s per DN 40 VK..XG:
ca. 10 s bei DN 80-100 approx. 10 s for DN 80-100 environ 5 s pour un DN de 40 ca. 13 s vanaf DN125 ca. 8 s per DN 50-65 aprox. 5 s para un DN de 40
ca. 13 s ab DN 125 approx. 13 s from DN 125 environ 8 s pour un DN de 50 à 65 ca. 10 s per DN 80-100 aprox. 8 s para un DN de 50 a
environ 10 s pour un DN de 80 à 100 Openingstijd bij VK..H: ca. 13 s a partire da DN 125 65
Öffnungszeit bei VK..H: Opening time on VK..H: environ 13 s à partir d’un DN de 125 ca. 18 s bij DN 50-100 aprox. 10 s para un DN de 80 a
ca. 18 s bei DN 50-100 approx. 18 s for DN 50-100 ca. 24 s bij DN 125-250 Tempo di apertura per VK..H: 100
ca. 24 s bei DN 125-250 approx. 24 s for DN 125-250 Temps d’ouverture pour VK..H : ca. 18 s per DN 50-100 aprox. 13 s a partir de un DN de 125
environ 18 s pour un DN de 50 à Wij adviseren, voor iedere apparaat ca. 24 s per DN 125-250
Wir empfehlen, vor jede Anlage ei- We recommend installing a filter up- 100 een filter te installeren. Tiempo de abertura de VK..H:
nen Filter zu installieren. stream of each installation. environ 24 s pour un DN de 125 à Kleppen zijn met een zeef uitgerust. Consigliamo l’installazione di un filtro aprox. 18 s para un DN de 50 a
Ventile sind mit Sieb ausgerüstet. Valves are fitted with a strainer 250 Kleppen zijn buigvast naar EN 161 a monte di ogni impianto. 100
Ventile sind biegefest nach EN 161, (1 mm pingauge). groep 2. Le valvole sono dotate di filtro a rete. aprox. 24 s para un DN de 125 a
Gruppe 2. Valves are manufactured in accord- Nous recommandons de monter un Overige specificaties zie het Le valvole sono resistenti alla flessione 250
Weitere Daten siehe Prospekt. ance with EN 161, group 2, con- filtre en amont de chaque installa- prospectus. come da norma EN 161, gruppo 2.
cerning flexural strength. tion. Per ulteriori dati: vedasi prospetto. En toda instalación es recomenda-
For further technical data see Les vannes sont équipées d’un ta- ble colocar un filtro en el inicio.
brochure. mis. Las válvulas van provistas de un ta-
Les vannes sont résistantes aux miz.
flexions, selon EN 161, groupe 2. Las válvulas son resistentes a la fle-
Pour de plus amples données, xión, según la norma EN 161, grupo 2.
prière de voir la brochure. Para más datos, véase el prospecto.

-2-
Motorventil in die Fitting the motorised Montage de la vanne Motorklep in de leiding Montaggio di una valvola Instalación de la válvula
Rohrleitung einbauen valve into the pipework motorisée dans la inbouwen motorizzata nella motorizada en la tubería

Verschlusskappen entfernen.
Remove the screw caps. tuyauterie
Afsluitkappen verwijderen. tubazione
Quite las tapas protectoras.

Durchflussrichtung beachten:
The direction of flow must coin-
Enlever les capuchons.
Let op doorstroomrichting: pijl op
Togliere i tappi di chiusura.
El sentido de flujo del gas debe
Pfeil am Gehäuse. cide with the arrow on the hous-
Observer le sens d’écoulement : het huis.
Osservare il senso di scorrimen- coincidir con el de la flecha situa-

In senkrechte oder waagerechte ing. flèche se trouvant sur le corps.
In verticale of horizontale leiding. to: freccia sul corpo valvola. da sobre el cuerpo.
Rohrleitung –
For installation in vertical or hori-
Montage dans une tuyauterie ver-
In verticale leiding: aansluitkast
In tubi verticali od orizzontali –
En tuberías verticales u horizon-

In senkrechter Rohrleitung: zontal pipework – ticale ou horizontale. naar boven wijzend!
In tubi verticali la cassetta di rac- tales.
Anschlusskasten nach oben zei-
In vertical pipework: connection
Montage dans une tuyauterie ver- 1 = 4 moeren los maken – vier cordo deve guardare verso l’alto.
En tuberías verticales: ¡con la ca-
gend! box must be pointing upwards. ticale : le coffret de raccordement bevestigingsschroeven los- 1 = Allentare 4 dadi – allentare i 4 ja de conexiones hacia arriba!
1 = Vier Muttern lösen – vier 1 = Loosen the four locking nuts devra être dirigé vers le haut ! draaien – bovendeel zo draai- viti a perno – girare la parte su- 1 = Afloje las 4 tuercas, afloje los
Madenschrauben lösen – and the four grub screws on 1 = Desserrer les quatre écrous, en, dat de aansluitkast toegan- periore in modo da rendere ac- 4 tornillos prisioneros, gire el
Oberteil so drehen, daß der An- the actuator base. Rotate the dévisserquatre vis sans tête, kelijk is – bevestigings- cessibile la cassetta di raccor- actuador de tal forma que la
schlusskasten zugänglich ist – actuator so that the connection tourner la partie supérieure de schroeven en moeren weer do – serrare nuovamente i dadi caja de conexiones sea fácil-
Madenschrauben und Muttern box is accessible. Retighten telle manière que le coffret de vast draaien. e le viti a perno. mente accesible. Apriete los
wieder festziehen. the grub screws and locking raccordement soit accessible,
Het huis mag geen metselwerk
Il corpo valvola non deve essere a tornillos y las tuercas.

Das Gehäuse darf kein Mauer- nuts. resserrer les vis sans tête et les raken, minimum afstand 20 mm. contatto con la muratura: distan-
El cuerpo no debe estar en
werk berühren, Mindestabstand
The housing must not touch its écrous.
Apparaten met schroefdraad: ge- za minima: 20 mm. contacto con paredes: separa-
20 mm. surrounding walls – min. dis-
Le corps de la vanne ne devra bruik passend gereedschap – af-
Valvola con attacchi filettati: usare ción mínima 20 mm.

Gerät mit Anschlussgewinde: tance: 20 mm. pas entrer en contact avec de la hankelijk van aansluitmaatlei- una chiave adatta – a seconda
Válvula con conexión roscada:
passenden Schraubenschlüssel
For connection to the pipework maçonnerie ; distance minimale ding – bovendeel niet als hef- del bocchettone di raccordo – use una llave apropiada depen-
verwenden – je nach Anschluss- use a suitable spanner – on the 20 mm. boom gebruiken. non usare la parte superiore co- diendo del racor de conexión. No
stutzen – Oberteil nicht als Hebel hexagonal faces provided – do
Matériel avec filetage de raccor- me leva. emplee el actuador como palan-
benutzen. not use the actuator as a lever. dement : utiliser une clé à vis ap- ca.
propriée, selon la tubulure de rac-
cordement ; ne pas se servir de la
partie supérieure comme levier.

Dichtheit prüfen Tightness test Contrôle d’étanchéité Dichtheid controleren Verifica della tenuta Prueba de estanquidad

Ventil unter Druck setzen – maxi-
Pressurise the valve, be careful
Mettre la vanne sous pression ;
Klep onder druk zetten – maxi-
Mettere sotto pressione la valvola
Someta a presión la válvula. No
malen Eingangsdruck pe max x not to exceed the max. inlet pres- ne pas dépasser en valeur male inlaatdruk pe max x 1,5 niet senza superare la pressione d’in- sobrepase la presión máxima de
1,5 nicht überschreiten – siehe sure pe max x 1.5 (see type label). supérieure la pression d’entrée overschrijden – zie typeplaatje. gresso massima pe max x 1,5 – v. entrada pe máx x 1,5. Véase la
Typenschild.
Cover the pipe connections with maximale pe max x 1,5. Voir pla-
Aansluitingen controleren op lek- targhetta dati. placa de características.

Rohrenden abseifen. soap solution. Check for leaks. que signalétique. kage d.m.v. een zeepoplossing.
Trattare con sapone l’estremità
Aplique agua jabonosa en los en-

Nach erfolgter Prüfung Prüfdruck, Remove the soap solution from
Traiter les raccordements des
Na controle de testdruk, die bo- del raccordo. laces con la tubería.
der über dem max. Eingangs- the pipe connections after tuyaux au savon. ven de max. inlaatdruk pe max ligt,
A controllo avvenuto, scaricare la
Después de haber realizado el
druck pe max liegt, ablassen, um testing.
Après l’épreuve, laisser échapper verlagen om storingen te voorko- pressione di prova superiore alla ensayo, reducir la presión de en-
Funktionsstörungen zu vermei-
After the test has been conduct- la pression d’épreuve excédant la men. massima pressione d’ingresso sayo que se encuentre por enci-
den. ed, relieve the test pressure pression d’entrée maximale, pe max per evitare disturbi nel fun- ma de la presión de entrada
which lies above the max. inlet pe max pour éviter tout risque de zionamento. pe máx, con la finalidad de evitar
pressure pe max in order to avoid détérioration du fonctionnement. errores en el funcionamiento.
malfunctions.

-3-
Motorventil elektrisch VK Electrical wiring of the Câblage électrique de la Motorklep electrisch Allacciamento elettrico Cableado eléctrico de la
verdrahten VK..R motorised valve vanne motorisée bedraden della valvola motorizzata válvula motorizada

Die Angaben auf dem Typen-
The data on the type label must
La tension marquée sur la plaque
De gegevens op het typeplaatje
I dati sulla targhetta dati devono
Las especificaciones de la placa
schild müssen mit der Netzspan- L2 N L1 coincide with the supply voltage signalétique devra correspondre dienen met de netspanning over- corrispondere alla tensione di re- de características deben estar de
nung übereinstimmen (Toleranz L1 (permissible variation +10%, à la tension du réseau d’alimenta- een te stemmen (tolerantie te (tolleranza +10%, –15%). acuerdo con las de la red eléctri-
+10 %, –15 %). N –15%). tion (tolérance +10%, –15%). +10%, –15%).
In assenza di corrente deve esse- ca (tolerancia + 10 %, –15 %).

Die Anlage muss spannungsfrei
The unit must be capable of
L’installation devra pouvoir être
Het apparaat moet spannings- re garantito l’arresto dell’impian-
La válvula ha de poder ser des-
geschaltet werden können: zwei- being isolated by means of a mise hors tension : monter en loos geschakeld worden: dubbel- to: interporre un dispositivo di se- conectada totalmente: intercale
polige (!) Trennvorrichtung vor- VK..S double pole switch – isolating link amont un appareillage de sec- polige (!) schakelaar aanbren- parazione bipolare (!) – interruttore un dispositivo de aislamiento bi-
schalten – Hauptschalter, Siche- or fused spur box – a contact gap tionnement bipolaire (!), à savoir gen – hoofdschakelaar, zekerin- principale, fusibili ecc. – con polar (!) (interruptor principal, fusi-
rungen o.ä. – mit mindestens of at least 3 mm is recom- un interrupteur principal, des gen, ect. – met min. 3 mm un’apertura di contatto di almeno ble de seguridad, etc.) con una
3 mm Kontaktöffnungsweite. A B C L2 N L1 mended. coupe-circuits, des fusibles, etc. contactafstand. 3 mm. apertura de contacto mínima de

Anschlusskabel durch die Pg- L1
Insert the connection cable présentant une distance entre
Bedrading door de Pg-wortel lei-
Far passare il cavo di raccordo 3 mm.
Verschraubung führen und an die N through the Pg gland nut and contacts de 3 mm au moins. den en op de klemmen aan- attraverso il pressacavo Pg e col-
Pase el cable de conexión a tra-
Klemmen anschließen – Pg- C A B grommet, connect to the termi-
Passer le câble de raccordement sluiten – Pg-wortel aandraaien. legarlo al serrafilo – avvitare il vés de la tuerca prensa para en-
Durchführung verschrauben. B nals and tighten the gland nut. à travers le raccord fileté Pg (tra-  Bij VK..T5/K: Noodstop drukknop pressacavo Pg. trada de cable Pg y conéctelo a
A
 Bei VK..T5/K: Not-Aus-Taster C  On VK..T5/K: Fit an Emergency versée de câble) et en raccorder aanbrengen.  Con VK..T5/K: utilizzare un inter- los bornes, enrosque la tuerca
vorsehen. Stop button. les conducteurs aux bornes ; ser-
Deksel weer op aansluitkast zet- ruttore per l’arresto di emer- prensa para entrada de cable Pg.

Deckel wieder auf den An- VK..Z..S
Replace the cover of the connec- rer les vis de l’entrée de câble Pg. ten en vastschroeven. genza.  En VK..T5/R: prever un pulsador
schlusskasten aufsetzen und ver- tion box and screw into place.  Pour VK..T5/K : prévoir un inter-
Rimettere il coperchio sulla cas- de parada de emergencia.
schrauben. rupteur d’arrêt d’urgence. setta di raccordo e avvitarlo.
Coloque y atornille de nuevo la
A B C L2 N L1
Remettre en place le couvercle tapa de la caja de conexiones.
LV1 sur le coffret de raccordement et
N en serrer les vis.
LV2
C A B
L1 = Phase B L1 = phase L1 = phase L1 = fase L1 = fase L1 = fase
N = Neutralleiter A N = neutral conductor N = conducteur de neutre N = nul N = conduttore neutro N = conductor neutro
LV1 = Phase für 1. Stufe C LV1 = phase for 1st stage LV1 = phase pour premier étage LV1 = fase voor eerste trap LV1 = fase per il 1° stadio LV1 = fase para etapa 1
LV2 = Phase für 2. Stufe LV2 = phase for 2nd stage LV2 = phase pour deuxième étage LV2 = fase voor tweede trap LV2 = fase per il 2° stadio LV2 = fase para etapa 2
VK..T5/K
Bei offenem Stromkreis ist das When the electric circuit is open Lorsque le circuit est ouvert, la Bij geopend stroomcircuit is de La valvola è chiusa quando il cir- Cuando el circuito está abierto,
Ventil geschlossen. the valve is closed. vanne est fermée. klep gesloten. cuito elettrico è aperto. la válvula está cerrada.
Bei geschlossenem Stromkreis A B L3 L2 N L1 When the electric circuit is Lorsque le circuit est fermé, la Bij gesloten stroomcircuit is de La valvola è aperta quando il cir- Cuando el circuito está cerrado,
ist das Ventil geöffnet. L1 closed the valve is open. vanne est ouverte. klep geopend. cuito elettrico è chiuso. la válvula está abierta.
N
Bei zweistufigen Motorventilen: + For two-stage motorised valves: Dans le cas des vannes moto- Bij twee traps motorkleppen: Per valvole motorizzate a due En el caso de válvulas motoriza-
Die zweite Stufe kann erst einge- 24 V= The second stage can only be risées à 2 étages : De tweede trap kan pas inge- stadi: das de dos etapas:
–
schaltet werden, wenn die erste opened after the first stage has le deuxième étage ne pourra être schakeld worden, als de eerste Il secondo stadio può venire in- La segunda etapa solo puede
Stufe durchlaufen ist. completed its operation. enclenché que lorsque le pre- trap doorgelopen is. serito solo a conclusione del pri- ser activada una vez que se haya
mier étage aura été ouvert. mo. efectuado la primera etapa.

Volumenstrom einstellen Adjusting the main flow Réglage du débit Volumenstroom instellen Regolazione della Ajuste de caudal
Volumenstrom bis einschließlich rate (second stage) Débit réglable jusqu’au diamètre no- Volumestroom instelbaar tot en met portata Caudal ajustable hasta un diámetro
Nennweite DN 100 einstellbar. Flow rate adjustable up to and includ- minal DN 100 inclus. een nominale diameter van DN 100. Portata regolabile fino a diametro no- nominal de DN 100 inclusivo.

Evtl. Manometer anschließen – ing nominal size DN 100.
Raccorder éventuellement un
Event. manometer aansluiten – minale DN 100 incluso.
Si es posible, conecte un manó-
Druck vor dem Brenner messen.
Connect a pressure gauge down- manomètre ; mesurer la pression druk voor de brander meten.
Collegare eventualmente un ma- metro. Mida la presión antes del

Ventil schließen – die Hubein- stream of the gas valve to meas- en amont du brûleur.
Klep sluiten – volumenstroomin- nometro – misurare la pressione a quemador.
stellschraube läßt sich dann leich- ure the pressure on the burner
Fermer la vanne ; la vis de réglage stelschroef laat zich dan gema- monte del bruciatore.
Cierre la válvula: de esta manera
ter drehen. head. de la course pourra alors être kelijker draaien.
Chiudere la valvola – in tal modo se puede hacer girar con facilidad
1 = Verschlussschraube mit Sechs-
With the valve in the closed posi- tournée plus facilement. 1 = Afsluitschroef met inbussleutel la vite di regolazione della portata el tornillo para ajuste de carrera.
kantstiftschlüssel herausdrehen. tion, the throughput adjusting 1 = Dévisser le bouchon d’obtura- eruit draaien – bij levering is de si può svitare più facilmente. 1 = Desenrosque el tapón usando
Bei Lieferung ist die screw can be turned more easily. tion au moyen d’une clé mâle. 2 = volumenstroominstelschroef 1 = Togliere la vite di chiusura con la llave Allen.
2 = Hubeinstellschraube voll geöff- 1 = Remove the screw plug with an A la livraison geheel geopend. Volumen- la chiave a brugola – Alla forni- 2 = En el momento del suministro
net – Hubeinstellschraube mit Allen key. On delivery 2 = la vis de réglage de la course stroominstelschroef met inbus- tura la el tornillo para ajuste de carrera
Stiftsechskantschlüssel dre- 2 = the throughput adjustor is in est entièrement ouverte. Tour- sleutel draaien tot de gewenste 2 = vite di regolazione della portata está completamente abierto.
hen, bis der gewünschte the fully open position. Turn the ner la vis de réglage de la branderdruk respectievelijk è completamente aperta. Usando una llave Allen, gire el
Brennerdruck bzw. Durchfluss throughput adjustor screw with course au moyen de la clé doorstroming berijkt is. Svitare con una chiave a bru- tornillo para ajuste de carrera
erreicht ist: an Allen key until the required mâle jusqu’à ce que la pres- Met de richting gola la vite di regolazione della hasta alcanzar la presión re-
Im Uhrzeigersinn = kleinerer burner pressure or flow rate is sion désirée au brûleur ou le van de klok = kleinere portata fino al raggiungimento querida en el quemador:
Strom. attained: débit désiré soit atteint : volumen- della pressione desiderata al Hacia la derecha = dismi-
Gegen Clockwise = to increase en sens horaire = débit plus stroom. bruciatore: nuye el
Uhrzeigersinn = größerer flow rate. faible. Tegen de richting In senso orario = la portata caudal.
Strom. Anti-clockwise = to decrease en sens inverse van de klok = grotere diminuisce. Hacia la izquierda = aumenta
1 = Verschlussschraube wieder flow rate. horaire = débit plus volumen- In senso antiorario= la portata el caudal.
einsetzen. 1 = Fit the screw plug. impor- stroom. aumenta. 1 = Enrosque de nuevo el tapón.
tant. 1 = Afsluitschroef weer terugzet- 1 = Rimettere la vite di chiusura.
1 = Revisser le bouchon d’obtura- ten.
tion.

-4-
Startgasmenge Adjusting the first stage Réglage du gaz de Startgashoeveelheid Regolazione del gas Ajuste del caudal inicial
einstellen flow rate démarrage instellen iniziale Sólo para VK..Z..S = válvula de dos
Nur bei VK..Z..S = Zweistufengerät. VK..Z..S = two-stage appliance only. Uniquement dans le cas de la vanne Alleen voor VK..Z..S twee traps Solo per VK..Z..S = valvole bistadio. etapas.

Evtl. Manometer anschließen –
Connect a pressure gauge down- VK..Z..S = matériel biétagé. apparaat.
Collegare eventualmente un ma-
Si es posible, conecte un manó-
Druck vor dem Brenner messen. stream of the gas valve to meas-
Raccorder éventuellement un
Event. manometer aansluiten – nometro – misurare la pressione a metro. Mida la presión antes del
1 = Deckel abnehmen: 4 Schrau- ure the pressure at the burner manomètre ; mesurer la pression druk voor brander meten. monte del bruciatore. quemador.
ben. head. en amont du brûleur. 1 = Deksel afnemen: 4 schroeven. 1 = Togliere il coperchio: 4 viti. 1 = Retire la tapa: 4 tornillos.

1. Stufe einstellen – nach Angabe 1 = Remove the lower cover – 1 = Enlever le couvercle : 4 vis.
Eerste trap instellen – naar opga-
Regolazione del primo stadio – in
Ajuste la primera etapa, según las
des Brennerherstellers. 4 screws.
Régler le premier étage, en se ve van de branderfabrikant. base ai dati del produttore del especificaciones del fabricante

Brennersteuerung von Hand auf
Adjust the first stage to the flow conformant aux instructions du
Branderbesturing met de hand bruciatore. del quemador.
1. Stufe stellen – as required by the burner manu- constructeur de brûleurs. op eerste trap instellen.
Posizionare manualmente il co-
Ajuste, manualmente, el control
2 = Schraube mit Sechskantstift- facturer.
Positionner la commande du 2 = Schroef met inbussleutel draai- mando del bruciatore sul primo del quemador a la primera etapa.
schlüssel drehen, bis die
Set the burner control to 1st brûleur manuellement sur le pre- en tot de gewenste startgas- stadio. 2 = Gire el tornillo con la llave Allen
gewünschte Startgasmenge stage position by hand. mier étage. hoeveelheid berijkt is: 2 = Svitare la vite con la chiave a hasta alcanzar el caudal de gas
erreicht ist: 2 = Turn the Allen screw with an Al- 2 = Tourner la vis au moyen d’une Met de richting brugola fino ad ottenere l’ero- inicial requerido:
Im Uhrzeigersinn = kleinere len key until the required start clé mâle, jusqu’à ce que le dé- van de klok = kleinere gazione della quantità deside- Hacia la derecha = dismi-
Menge. gas rate is attained: bit de gaz de démarrage désiré hoeveel- rata di gas iniziale: nuye el
Gegen Clockwise = to decrease soit atteint : heid. In senso orario = la quan- caudal.
Uhrzeigersinn = größere flow rate. en sens horaire = débit plus Tegen de richting tità dimi- Hacia la izquierda = aumenta
Menge. Anti-clockwise = to increase faible. van de klok = grotere nuisce. el caudal.
flow rate. en sens inverse hoeveel- In senso antiorario = la quan-
horaire = débit plus heid. tità au-
impor- menta.
tant.

Meldeschalter einstellen To adjust closed position Réglage de l’indicateur Eindschakelaar instellen Regolazione dell’indica- Ajuste del indicador de
Nur bei VK..S – zur Meldung der indicator / alarm switch de position Alleen voor VK..S – te gebruiken als tore di posizione posición
Ventilstellung ZU oder als Stufen- 2 Only VK..S, CPI = CLOSED or Uniquement dans le cas de vannes “klep gesloten” of als trapmelder (bij Solo nei modelli VK..S per la Sólo en VK..S para indicar la posi-
melder (bei VK..Z..S). VK..Z..S stage alarm. VK..S, pour la signalisation de la po- VK..Z..S). segnalazione della posizione della ción CERRADA o como indicador
3 = Schraube mit Sechskantstift- 3 = Turn the screw with an Allen sition FERMEE de la vanne ou com- 3 = Schroef met inbussleutel draai- valvola CHIUSO o come segnalazio- de etapas (en VK..Z..S).
schlüssel drehen, bis der key until the pulley wheel on me appareil de signalisation d’étage en tot de schakelaar bij de ge- ne degli stadi (nel modello 3 = Usando la llave Allen, gire el
Schalter beim gewünschten the lever reaches the indicating (dans le cas de la vanne wenste slag omschakeld: VK..Z..S). tornillo hasta que el interruptor
Hub umschaltet: position below the driving VK..Z..S). Met de richting 3 = Girare la vite con la chiave a conmute a la posición requeri-
Im Uhrzeigersinn = kleinerer 3 plate. When the piston moves 3 = Tourner la vis au moyen d’une van de klok = kleinere brugola fino a che l’interruttore da de carrera:
Hub. the plate will engage the lever clé mâle, jusqu’à ce que, la slag. commuta con la portata voluta: Hacia la derecha = dismi-
Gegen and the N/O N/C contacts will course désirée atteinte, l’inter- Tegen de richting In senso orario = la portata nuye la
Uhrzeigersinn = größerer change over. rupteur assure la commutation : van de klok = grotere diminu- carrera.
Hub. Clockwise = decrease lift en sens horaire = course slag. isce. Hacia la izquierda = aumenta
1 = Deckel wieder aufsetzen und indication. plus 1 = Deksel weer er op zetten en In senso antiorario = la portata la carrera.
festschrauben. Anti-clockwise = increase lift courte. vastschroeven. aumenta. 1 = Coloque de nuevo la tapa y
indication. en sens inverse 1 = Rimettere il coperchio e serrare apriete los tornillos.
1 = Replace the cover and screw horaire = course con viti.
into place. plus im-
portante.
1 = Remettre en place le couvercle
et en serrer les vis.

-5-
Kontrolle des Gehäuse- Checking the actuator Contrôler la partie Controle op oliedichtheid Controllo della parte Comprobar en el
Oberteils auf Öldichtheit for oil leakage supérieure du corps van het bovendeel van superiore del corpo su actuador la estanquidad
1x jährlich. Annually. pour l’étanchéité à l’huile het huis tenuta d’olio al aceite
1 = Deckel abnehmen – steht im 1 = If there is an indication of an ex- Une fois tous les ans. 1 x per jaar. 1 volta all’anno. Una vez al año.
Gehäuse Öl – mehr als einige cessive oil leak from the actua- 1 = Enlever le couvercle ; vérifier si 1 = Deksel afnemen – staat in het 1 = Togliere il coperchio – se nel 1 = Quite la tapa. Si en el cuerpo
Tropfen. tor remove the cover to check de l’huile s’est accumulée dans huis olie – meer dan een paar corpo valvola c’è più di qual- del aparato quedan bastantes

Motorventil ausbauen und zur the oil level. le corps. Au cas où il y aurait druppels: che goccia d’olio. gotas de aceite.
Überprüfung an das Hersteller-
Remove the motorised valve and plus de quelques gouttes :
Motorklep uitbouwen en ter con-
Smontare la valvola motorizzata e
Desmonte la válvula motorizada y
werk schicken. return to the manufacturer for
Démonter la vanne motorisée et trole aan het leverancier (fabri- spedirla in fabbrica per il control- envíela al fabricante para que sea

Steht kein Öl im Gehäuse – oder servicing. l’envoyer à l’usine du construc- kant) sturen. lo. revisada.
nur in Spuren,
If there is no oil leakage or just a teur pour contrôle.
Staat geen olie in het huis – of al-
Se nel corpo non c’è olio, o solo
Si no hay aceite en la cubierta o
1 = Deckel wieder aufsetzen und trace
Au cas où il n’y a pas d’huile dans leen maar een klein beetje piccole tracce. sólo muy poco.
festschrauben. 1 = replace the cover and screw in- le corps ou qu’il n’y a que des 1 = Deksel weer er op zetten en 1 = Rimettere il coperchio e serrar- 1 = Coloque de nuevo la tapa y
to place. traces d’huiles vastschroeven. lo con le viti. apriete los tornillos.
1 = Remettre en place le couvercle
et en serrer les vis.

Wartung Maintenance Maintenance Onderhoud Manutenzione Mantenimiento

Sieb reinigen oder austauschen Clean or replace strainer Nettoyer le tamis ou le Zeef schoonmaken of Pulizia o cambio del filtro Limpieza o sustitución del filtro-
1x jährlich, bei Biogas 2x jährlich. Once a year, or twice a year for remplacer uitwisselen 1 volta all’anno, nel caso di biogas tamiz

Kugelhahn schließen. biologically produced methane. Une fois tous les ans. Au cas où le 1 x per jaar, bij biogas 2 x per jaar. 2 volte all’anno. Una vez al año. Con biogás duas
 Unterer Gehäusedeckel steht un-
Close manual valve. fluide est du biogaz, nettoyer le ta-
Kogelkraan sluiten.
Chiudere la valvola a sfera. veces al año.
ter starker Vorspannung –  Lower housing cover is highly mis deux fois par an.  Onderste huisdeksel staat onder  Il coperchio inferiore del corpo è
Cierre la válvula de bola.
1 = Alle Schrauben am unteren prestressed –
Fermer le robinet à boisseau sterke voorspanning – sottoposto a forte tensione inizia-  La tapa inferior del cuerpo se en-
Gehäusedeckel gleichmäßig 1 = Unscrew all screws on lower sphérique. 1 = Alle schroeven aan het onder- le – cuentra bajo una fuerte presión
herausdrehen. housing cover uniformly.  Le joint élastique du couvercle in- ste huisdeksel er gelijkmatig 1 = Togliere uniformemente tutte le previa –
2 = Unteren Gehäusedeckel her- 2 = Remove the lower housing férieur du corps est fortement uitdraaien. viti del coperchio inferiore del 1 = Desenrosque de forma simul-
ausheben und abnehmen. cover, check O-rings. Replace serré – 2 = Onderste huisdeksel eruit tillen corpo. tánea todos los tornillos de la
O-Ringe prüfen. Bei Abnut- if worn, hardened or swollen. 1 = Dévisser progressivement et en afnemen. O-ringen contro- 2 = Sollevare e togliere il coperchio tapa inferior.
zung, Verhärtung oder Quel- 3 = Pull out strainer, clean or re- alternant toutes les vis dis- leren. Bij slijtage, verharding of inferiore del corpo. Controllare 2 = Saque la tapa inferior.
lung austauschen. place. posées dans le couvercle in- opzwelling uitwisselen. le guarnizioni O e cambiarle in Verifique las juntas tóricas. Si
3 = Sieb herausziehen, reinigen
For biologically produced meth- férieur du corps. 3 = Zeef eruit nemen, schoonma- caso di usura, indurimento o ri- están gastadas, endurecidas o
oder erneuern. ane check springs for corrosion, 2 = Retirer le couvercle inférieur du ken of vernieuwen. gonfiamento. hinchadas, cámbielas.

Bei Biogas Feder auf Korrosion replace lower housing cover if corps et l’enlever. Contrôler les
Bij biogas veer op corrosie con- 3 = Togliere il filtro a rete, pulirlo e 3 = Extraiga el filtro-tamiz; límpielo
prüfen, gegebenenfalls unteren necessary, see table. joints toriques. En cas d’usure, troleren, eventueel het onderste sostituirlo. o cámbielo.
Gehäusedeckel. austauschen,
Check valve disc for damage. de durcissement ou de gonfle- huisdeksel uitwisselen – zie tabel.
In caso di biogas, controllare se le
Al operar con biogás, verifique si
siehe Tabelle.
Reassemble parts. ment, les remplacer.
Klepschotel op schade controle- molle sono corrose, se necessa- la muelle muestra corrosión y, en

Ventilteller auf Beschädigungen
Check air-tightness – soap off 3 = Retirer le tamis, le nettoyer ou ren. rio sostituire il coperchio inferiore caso necesario, cambie la tapa
kontrollieren. joint between cover and housing. le remplacer.
Delen weer samen bouwen. del corpo, v. tabella. inferior. Véase la tabla.

Teile wieder zusammenbauen.
Au cas où le fluide est du biogaz,
Dichtheid controleren – dekselaf-
Verificare la testa della valvola su
Comprobar si el plato de la válvu-

Dichtheit prüfen – Deckelfuge ab- contrôler le ressort pour voir s’il dichting op lek controleren d.m.v. danneggiamento. la está deteriorado.
seifen. est corrodé ; procéder éventu- zeepoplossing.
Riassemblare le parti.
Ensamble de nuevo las partes.
ellement au remplacement du
Controllare la tenuta – trattare
Compruebe si hay fugas. Aplique
couvercle inférieur du corps. Voir con sapone la giuntura del co- agua jabonosa en la junta de la
tableau. perchio. tapa.

Contrôler la tête de vanne pour
détérioration.

Réassembler les pièces.

Contrôler l’étanchéité des raccor-
dements avec de l’eau savon-
neuse.

-6-
Umbau von VK in VK..S Conversion of VK to Transformation de la Ombouw van VK in Trasformazione di VK in Conversión de VK.. en
oder VK..Z..S VK..S or VK..Z..S vanne VK en VK..S ou en VK..S of VK..Z..S VK..S o VK..Z..S VK..S o en VK..Z..S

Elektrische Verdrahtung lösen
Disconnect electric wires and re- VK..Z..S
Electrische bedrading losmaken
Togliere il cablaggio elettrico.
Desconecte los cables eléctricos
und entfernen. move.
Déconnecter le câblage électri- en wegnemen. 1 = Allentare i dadi ed i viti a perno y retírelos.
1 = Muttern lösen und Maden- 1 = Loosen nuts and remove the que et l’enlever. 1 = Moer losmaken en bevesti- e toglierle. 1 = Afloje las tuercas y desenros-
schrauben herausdrehen. grub screws. 1 = Dévisser les écrous et les vis gingsschroeven eruit draaien.
Togliere la parte superiore. que por completo los tornillos.

Oberteil abnehmen.
Remove the actuator. sans tête.
Bovendeel wegnemen.
Mettere una nuova parte superio-
Retire el actuador.

Neues Oberteil aufsetzen – der
Attach the new actuator, the lever
Démonter la partie supérieur.
Nieuw bovendeel er op zetten – re – la leva con la rotella deve ap-
Coloque el nuevo actuador. La
Hebel mit der Rolle muss unter with the pulley attached must fit
Mettre en place une nouvelle par- de hefboom met de rol moet on- poggiarsi sotto il disco posto sul palanca junto con la polea debe
die Mitnehmerscheibe greifen. underneath the driving plate. tie supérieure ; le levier portant le der de meenemerschijf grijpen. perno dell’otturatore. quedar enclavada por debajo del
1 = Madenschrauben mit Muttern 1 = Fit the grub screws and nuts. rouleau devra s’engager sous le 1 = Bevestigingsschroeven met 1 = Infilare i viti a perno con i dadi e disco de arrastre.
einsetzen und festziehen.
Rewire the actuator. disque d’entraînement. moereninzetten en vastzetten. serrare. 1 = Coloque y apriete los tornillos

Motorventil neu verdrahten. 1 = Mettre en place les vis sans
Motorklep opnieuw bedraden.
Eseguire un nuovo cablaggio per junto con las tuercas.
tête avec les écrous et les la valvola motorizzata.
Realice las conexiones eléctricas
serrer. para la válvula motorizada.

Recâbler la vanne motorisée.

Wenn die Hydraulik If the hydraulic system Lorsque la partie Wanneer de hydraulisch Quando la parte idraulica Si la parte hidráulica
undicht geworden ist leaks hydraulique a des fuites gedeelte ondicht non è più a tenuta presenta fugas
Das ist daran zu erkennen, dass sich This can be seen when in contin- Il est possible de reconnaître cet état geworden is Ciò si può riconoscere dal fatto che Se detecta cuando, en funcio-
der Motor bei Dauerbetrieb mehr als uous operation the motor switches au fait qu’en service permanent le Dit is te herkennen, wanneer de mo- il motore in esercizio continuo si riac- namiento continuo, el motor arranca
zehnmal in der Stunde einschaltet on (repumps) more than ten times moteur n’enclenche (pompe) pas tor bij continubedrijf meer dan tien cende più di 10 volte in un’ora (pom- más de diez veces en una hora.
(nachpumpt). per hour. plus de dix fois par heure. keer binnen een uur inschakeld (na- pa in continuazione).
Desconecte los cables eléctricos.

Elektrische Verdrahtung lösen.
Disconnect the electric wiring.
Déconnecter le câblage électri- pompt).
Togliere il cablaggio elettrico. 1 = Afloje las tuercas y desenros-
1 = Muttern lösen und Maden- 1 = Loosen nuts and remove grub que.
Electrische bedrading losmaken. 1 = Allentare i dadi e togliere i viti a que por completo los tornillos.
schrauben herausdrehen. screws. 1 = Desserrer les écrous et dévis- 1 = Moeren losmaken en bevesti- perno.
Desmonte el actuador y envíelo al

Oberteil abnehmen und zur Über-
Remove the actuator and send to ser les vis sans tête. gingsschroeven eruit draaien.
Togliere la parte superiore e man- fabricante para que sea repara-
holung an Herstellerwerk manufacturer for servicing.
Démonter la partie supérieure et
Bovendeel afnemen en ter revisie darla in fabbrica per la revisione. do.
schicken. l’envoyer dans l’usine du cons- aan de leverancier (fabrikant) stu-
tructeur pour révision générale. ren.

Wenn das Oberteil If the actuator is Si la partie supérieure Als het bovenste Se la parte superiore è Si el actuador es
defekt ist, defective est défectueuse gedeelte defect is difettosa defectuoso
darf nach Abnahme des Oberteils the valve stem may not be pressed après avoir enlevé la partie supé- mag na het verwijderen van het bo- dopo aver tolto la parte superiore el husillo de la válvula no debe ser
die Ventilspindel nicht „von Hand“ downwards either “manually” or rieure, il ne faut pas abaisser la tige venste gedeelte de klepspil niet “met non si deve assolutamente premere presionado hacia abajo “manual-
oder mittels Hilfswerkzeug nach un- using a tool after detaching the ac- de vanne “à la main” ou au moyen de hand” of door middel van een verso il basso il perno della valvola mente” o con la ayuda de una her-
ten gedrückt werden – Explosions- tuator – explosion risk! d’un outil auxiliaire – risque d’explo- hulpwerktuig naar beneden worden né a mano né tramite utensile ausi- ramienta auxiliar después de extraer
gefahr! sion ! geduwd – explosiegevaar! liare – pericolo d’esplosione! la parte superior, ya que existe peli-
gro de explosión.

-7-
Zubehör Accessories Accessoires Toebehoren Accessori Accesorios
Einen Meldeschalter einbauen Fitting one position indicator Installer un indicateur de Een eindschakelaar inbouwen Montaggio di un indicatore di Montar un indicador de posición
1 Motorventil spannungsfrei schal- 1 Disconnect the motorised valve position 1 De motorklep spanningsvrij ma- posizione 1 Desconectar de la tensión la vál-
ten und Gaszufuhr absperren. and shut down the gas supply. 1 Mettre la vanne motorisée hors ken en de gastoevoer afsluiten. 1 Togliere tensione alla valvola mo- vula motorizada y cerrar el sumi-
 Das Schaltbild zeigt das ge-  The diagram shows the closed tension et fermer l’alimentation en  Het schakelschema toont het torizzata e bloccare l'afflusso di nistro de gas.
schlossene Ventil. valve. gaz. gesloten klep. gas.  El cuadro de conexiones mos-
A–B schließt, sobald das Ventil A–B closes as soon as the valve  Le schéma représente la vanne A–B gaat dicht zodra de klep  La figura mostra la valvola chiusa. trará la válvula cerrada.
offen ist. is open. fermée. open is. A–B si chiude, appena la valvola A–B se cerrará tan pronto como
A–B se ferme dès que la vanne si apre. esté abierta la válvula.
est ouverte.
VK..S 7 8 9

15 Schraube A mit Sechskantstift- 15 Turn screw A with an Allen key 15 Tourner la vis A à l’aide d’une clé 15 Met een inbussleutel aan schroef 15 Avvitare la vite A con una chiave 15 Girar el tornillo A con una llave Al-
schlüssel drehen, bis der Schalter until the switch changes over mâle normale jusqu’à ce que l’in- A draaien totdat de schakelaar bij a brugola, fino a far commutare len hasta que el interruptor con-
bei geöffnetem Ventil umschaltet: when the valve is open: terrupteur change de position geopende klep omschakelt: l’interruttore con la valvola aperta: mute con la válvula abierta:
im Uhrzeigersinn = kleinerer Hub, Clockwise = smaller stroke lorsque la vanne est ouverte : met de richting van de klok = klei- in senso orario = alzata minore Hacia la derecha = carrera me-
gegen Uhrzeigersinn = größerer Hub. Anti-clockwise = larger stroke en sens horaire = course plus nere slag, in senso antiorario = alzata mag- nor.
16 Deckel wieder aufsetzen und 16 Replace the cover and screw into courte tegen de richting van de klok = giore Hacia la izquierda = carrera
festschrauben. place. en sens inverse horaire = course grotere slag. 16 Rimettere il coperchio e serrare mayor.
plus importante 16 Deksel weer er op zetten en vast- con viti. 16 Coloque de nuevo la tapa y aprie-
16 Remettre en place le couvercle et schroeven. te los tornillos.
en serrer les vis.

-8-
Zwei Meldeschalter einbauen Fitting two position indicators Installer deux indicateurs de Twee eindschakelaars inbouwen Montaggio di due indicatori di Montar dos indicadores de
1 Motorventil spannungsfrei schal- 1 Disconnect the motorised valve position 1 De motorklep spanningsvrij ma- posizione posición
ten und Gaszufuhr absperren. and shut down the gas supply. 1 Mettre la vanne motorisée hors ken en de gastoevoer afsluiten. 1 Togliere tensione alla valvola mo- 1 Desconectar de la tensión la vál-
 Das Schaltbild zeigt das ge-  The diagram shows the closed tension et fermer l’alimentation en  Het schakelschema toont de torizzata e bloccare l’afflusso di vula motorizada y cerrar el sumi-
schlossene Ventil. valve. gaz. gesloten klep. gas. nistro de gas.
C–L2 öffnet, sobald das Motor- C–L2 opens as soon as the mo-  Le schéma représente la vanne C–L2 gaat open zodra het motor-  La figura mostra la valvola chiusa.  El cuadro de conexiones most-
ventil öffnet, torised valve opens, fermée. klep opengaat, C–L2 si apre, appena la valvola rará la válvula cerrada.
A–B schließt, sobald das Ventil A–B closes as soon as the valve C–L2 s’ouvre dès que la vanne A–B gaat dicht zodra de klep motorizzata si apre. C–L2 se abrirá tan pronto como
offen ist. is open. motorisée s’ouvre. open is. A–B si chiude, appena la valvola se abra la válvula motorizada,
A–B se ferme dès que la vanne si apre. A–B se cerrará tan pronto como
est ouverte. esté abierta la válvula.

VK..S2 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

74960023
11 12 13 14 15
M
B
A A B C L2 N L1
A B C L2 N L1 L1
C N
L2
L2
A = weiß, white, blanc, C
wit, bianco, blanco B
B = grau, grey, gris, A
grijs, grigio, gris
C = rosa, pink, rose,
L2 roze, rosa, rosa
B L2= grün, green, vert,
C A groen, verde, verde

16 Schraube A mit Sechskantstift- 16 Turn screw A with an Allen key 16 Tourner la vis A à l’aide d’une clé 16 Met een inbussleutel aan schroef 16 Avvitare la vite A con una chiave 16 Girar el tornillo A con una llave Al-
schlüssel drehen, bis der Schalter until the switch changes over mâle normale jusqu’à ce que l’in- A draaien totdat de schakelaar bij a brugola, fino a far commutare len hasta que el interruptor con-
bei geöffnetem Ventil umschaltet: B when the valve is open: terrupteur change de position geopende klep omschakelt: l’interruttore con la valvola aperta: mute con la válvula abierta:
im Uhrzeigersinn = kleinerer Hub, Clockwise = smaller stroke lorsque la vanne est ouverte : met de richting van de klok = klei- in senso orario = alzata minore Hacia la derecha = carrera me-
gegen Uhrzeigersinn = größerer Hub Anti-clockwise = larger stroke en sens horaire = course plus nere slag, in senso antiorario = alzata mag- nor.
17 Schraube B mit Sechskantstift- 17 Turn screw B with an Allen key petite tegen de richting van de klok = giore Hacia la izquierda = carrera
schlüssel drehen, bis der Schalter until the switch changes over en sens inverse horaire = course grotere slag. 17 Avvitare la vite B con una chiave mayor.
bei geschlossenem Ventil um- when the valve is closed: plus grande 17 Met een inbussleutel aan schroef a brugola, fino a far commutare 17 Girar el tornillo B con una llave Al-
schaltet:
A Clockwise = smaller stroke 17 Tourner la vis B à l’aide d’une clé B draaien totdat de schakelaar bij l’interruttore con la valvola chiusa: len hasta que el interruptor con-
im Uhrzeigersinn = kleinerer Hub, Anti-clockwise = larger stroke mâle normale jusqu’à ce que l’in- geopende klep omschakelt: in senso orario = alzata minore mute con la válvula cerrada:
gegen Uhrzeigersinn = größerer Hub. 18 Replace the cover and screw into terrupteur change de position met de richting van de klok = klei- in senso antiorario = alzata mag- Hacia la derecha = carrera me-
18 Deckel wieder aufsetzen und place. lorsque la vanne est fermée : nere slag, giore nor.
festschrauben. en sens horaire = course plus tegen de richting van de klok = 18 Rimettere il coperchio e serrare Hacia la izquierda = carrera
courte grotere slag. con viti. mayor.
en sens inverse horaire = course 18 Deksel weer er op zetten en vast- 18 Coloque de nuevo la tapa y aprie-
plus importante schroeven. te los tornillos.
18 Remettre en place le couvercle et
en serrer les vis.

-9-
Relais zur „Wiederinbetriebnah- Fitting a relay for “manual Installer un relais pour “remise Relais voor de “hernieuwde Montaggio del relè per la Montar el relé para “la nueva
me von Hand“ einbauen restart” en service manuelle” inbedrijfstelling met de hand” “rimessa in funzione manuale” puesta en marcha manual”
1 Motorventil spannungsfrei schal- 1 Disconnect the motorised valve 1 Mettre la vanne motorisée hors inbouwen 1 Togliere tensione alla valvola mo- 1 Desconectar de la tensión la vál-
ten und Gaszufuhr absperren. and shut down the gas supply. tension et fermer l’alimentation en 1 De motorklep spanningsvrij ma- torizzata e bloccare l’afflusso di vula motorizada y cerrar el sumi-
 Nach einem Spannungsausfall  After a power failure the red but- gaz. ken en de gastoevoer afsluiten. gas. nistro de gas.
muss erst der rote Taster ge- ton must be pressed first to open  Après une panne de secteur, il  Na een stroomonderbreking  Dopo una caduta di tensione pre-  Después de fallar la tensión, ha
drückt werden, um das Motor- the motorised valve again. faut tout d’abord appuyer sur la moet eerst de rode drukknop in- mere soltanto il tasto rosso per de activarse primero el pulsador
ventil wieder zu öffnen.  If a position indicator is also being touche rouge pour ouvrir de nou- gedrukt worden om de motorklep riaprire la valvola motorizzata. rojo para abrir de nuevo la válvu-
 Bei gleichzeitiger Montage eines fitted, strip the grey cable sheath. veau la vanne motorisée. weer te openen.  In caso di montaggio congiunto la motorizada.
Meldeschalters grauen Kabel-  En cas d’installation simultanée  Bij gelijktijdig montage van een di un indicatore di posizione, to-  En caso de un montaje simultá-
mantel abisolieren. d’un indicateur de position, isoler eindschakelaar de grijze kabel- gliere la guaina isolante del cavo neo de un indicador de posición,
la gaine de câble grise. mantel isoleren. grigio. deberá aislarse la camisa de
cable gris.

VK..R 2 3 4 5 6 L1 = braun, 7
brown,
marron,
bruin, A B C L2 N L1
A B C L2 N L1 marrone, L1
marrón N
N = weiß, white,
blanc, wit,
bianco,
blanco
L2 = grün, green,
vert, groen,
verde, verde

8 Deckel wieder aufsetzen und 8 Replace the cover and screw into 8 Remettre en place le couvercle et 8 Deksel weer er op zetten en vast- 8 Rimettere il coperchio e serrare 8 Coloque de nuevo la tapa y aprie-
festschrauben. place. en serrer les vis. schroeven. con viti. te los tornillos.

Technische Änderungen, die dem We reserve the right to make techni- Sous réserve de modifications tech- Technische wijzigingen ter verbete- Salvo modifiche tecniche per miglio- Se reserva el derecho a realizar mo-
Fortschritt dienen, vorbehalten. cal modifications in the interests of niques visant à améliorer nos pro- ring van onze producten voorbehou- rie. dificaciones técnicas sin previo avi-
progress. duits. den. so.

Zentrale Kundendienst-Einsatz- G. Kromschröder AG Further support is available from Pour toute assistance, vous pouvez Verdere ondersteuning krijgt u bij de Per maggiori informazioni rivolgersi Puede recibir soporte adicional en la
Leitung für Deutschland: Postfach 28 09 your local branch office/agent. The également contacter votre agence/ plaatselijke vestiging/vertegenwoor- alla filiale/rappresentanza compe- sucursal/representación que a Ud.
G. Kromschröder AG, Osnabrück D-49018 Osnabrück addresses are available on the Inter- représentation la plus proche dont diging. Het adres is op het internet tente. L’indirizzo è disponibile su In- le corresponda. La dirección la pue-
Herr Kozlowski Strotheweg 1 net or from G. Kromschröder AG, l’adresse est disponible sur Internet te vinden of u wendt zich tot ternet o può essere richiesto alla de obtener en Internet o a través de
Tel. 05 41/12 14-3 65 D-49504 Lotte (Büren) Osnabrück. ou auprès de la société G. Krom- G. Kromschröder AG in Osnabrück. G. Kromschröder AG, Osnabrück. la empresa G. Kromschröder AG,
Fax 05 41/12 14-5 47 Tel. +49 (0) 5 41/12 14-0 schröder AG, Osnabrück. Osnabrück.
Fax +49 (0) 5 41/12 14-3 70
Weitere Unterstützung erhalten Sie [email protected]
bei der für Sie zuständigen Nieder- www.kromschroeder.de
lassung/Vertretung. Die Adresse er-
fahren Sie im Internet oder bei der
G. Kromschröder AG, Osnabrück.

- 10 -
34428600 4.00 Fx/ivd 10.00 32.000

2.1.1.2 Edition 4.00

D DK S N P GR GB F NL I E

Gas-Druckregler
www.kromschroeder.de Gas governors Régulateurs de pression Gasdrukregelaars Stabilizzatori Reguladores de presión
J78 R, GDJ 15–50 J78 R, GDJ 15–50 de gaz J78 R, GDJ 15–50 di pressione del gas de gas
J78 R, GDJ 15–50 J78 R, GDJ 15–50 J78 R, GDJ 15–50

Betriebsanleitung Operating instructions Instructions de service Bedieningsvoorschrift Istruzioni d’uso Instrucciones de

 Bitte lesen und aufbewahren  Please read and keep  A lire attentivement et  Lezen en goed bewaren a. u. b.  Si prega di leggere utilización
in a safe place à conserver e conservare  Se ruega que lo lean
y conserven

J78 R

Einbauen Installation Montage Inbouwen Instalación

Einstellen Adjusting Réglage Instellen Montaggio Ajuste
Wartung Maintaining Entretien Onderhoudswerkzaamheden Regolazione Mantenimiento
Nur durch autorisiertes GDJ 15 GDJ 20-50 By authorised trained personnel Seulement par un spécialiste Alleen door geautoriseerd Manutenzione ¡Sólo por una persona formada
Fachpersonal! only! formé et autorisé ! vakpersoneel! Solo dall’esperto autorizzato! y autorizada!

WARNUNG! Unsachgemäßer Ein- WARNING! Incorrect installation, ATTENTION ! Un montage, un WAARSCHUWING! Ondeskundi- ATTENZIONE! Se montaggio, re- ¡ADVERTENCIA! La instalación,
bau, Einstellung, Veränderung, Be- adjustment, modification, opera- réglage, une modification, une utili- ge inbouw, instelling, wijziging, be- golazione, modifica, utilizzo o ma- ajuste, modificación, manejo o
dienung oder Wartung kann Ver- tion or maintenance may cause in- sation ou un entretien inadaptés diening of onderhoudswerkzaam- nutenzione non vengono eseguiti mantenimiento incorrecto puede
letzungen oder Sachschäden jury or material damage. risquent d’engendrer des domma- heden kunnen persoonlijk letsel of correttamente, possono verificarsi ocasionar daños personales o ma-
verursachen. Read the instructions before use. ges matériels ou corporels. materiële schade veroorzaken. infortuni o danni. teriales.
Anleitung vor dem Gebrauch le- This unit must be installed in ac- Lire les instructions avant utilisa- Aanwijzingen voor het gebruik le- Si prega di leggere le istruzioni pri- Leer las instrucciones antes de
sen. Dieses Gerät muß nach den cordance with the regulations in tion. Cet appareil doit être installé zen. Dit apparaat moet overeen- ma di utilizzare l’impianto che do- usar. Este aparato debe ser insta-
geltenden Vorschriften installiert force. en respectant les règlements en vi- komstig de geldende regels wor- vrà venire installato in base alle lado observando las normativas en
werden. gueur. den geïnstalleerd. normative vigenti. vigor.

Konformitäts- Certificate of conformity Attestation de conformité Certificaat Dichiarazione Certificado

bescheinigung We hereby declare that the products Nous déclarons que le produit van overeenstemming di conformità de conformidad
Wir erklären, daß die Produkte GDJ, marked with product ID GDJ, identifié par le numéro de pro- Wij verklaren dat de producten Dichiariamo che i prodotti Nosotros declaramos que los pro-
GDJ, gekennzeichnet mit der Pro- krom number CE 0087AO22, and duit CE 0087AO22, et le produit GDJ, gemerkt met het product- GDJ, contrassegnati con il numero ductos
D-49018 Osnabrück, Germany schroder J78R, marked with number J78R, identifié par le numéro identificatienummer CE 0087AO22, di identificazione prodotto CE GDJ, marcados con el nº de identifi-
dukt-ID-Nr. CE 0087AO22 und
GDJ C87AO6, C87AO6,
J78R, gekennzeichnet mit der Nr. en 0087AO22, e cación de producto CE 0087AO22, e
C87AO6, die grundlegenden Anfor- comply with the essential require- répondent aux exigences essentiel- J78R, gemerkt met het nummer J78R, contrassegnati con il numero J78R, marcados con el nº C87AO6,
derungen folgender Richtlinien erfül- ments of the following Directives: les des directives suivantes : C87AO6, C87AO6, cumplen con los requisitos básicos
len: K' 0087AO22 – 90/396/EEC, – 90/396/CEE, aan de fundamentele voorschriften rispondono ai requisiti essenziali de las siguientes Directivas:
– 90/396/EWG, – 89/392/EEC. – 89/392/CEE. van de volgende richtlijnen voldoen: posti dalle direttive seguenti: – 90/396/CEE,
– 89/392/EWG. The relevant products correspond to Les produits désignés en consé- – 90/396/EEG, – 90/396/CEE, – 89/392/CEE.
Die entsprechend bezeichneten the types tested by the notified body quence sont conformes aux types – 89/392/EEG. – 89/392/CEE. Los productos denominados de la
0087. éprouvés à l’organisme notifié 0087.
Produkte stimmen überein mit dem
bei der benannten Stelle 0087 ge- J78R Comprehensive quality assurance is Une assurance de la qualité com-
De overeenkomstig geïdentificeerde
producten komen overeen met de
I prodotti con tale contrassegno cor-
rispondono ai tipi esaminati dall'or-
forma arriba mencionada son con-
formes con los modelos de cons-
prüften Baumuster. door de aangewezen instantie 0087 ganismo notificato 0087. trucción ensayados por el respec-
guaranteed by a certified Quality plète est garantie par un système gecontroleerde typen. tivo Organismo Notificado 0087.
Eine umfassende Qualitätssicherung
EC Nr. C87AO6 System pursuant to DIN ISO 9001. qualité certifié selon DIN ISO 9001. La sicurezza della qualità è garantita
ist gewährleistet durch ein zertifizier- Een uitgebreide kwaliteitsborging da un sistema di management della El exhaustivo control de calidad está
tes Qualitätsmanagementsystem G. Kromschröder AG G. Kromschröder AG wordt gegarandeerd door een ge- qualità ai sensi della DIN ISO 9001. garantizado por un sistema de ges-
nach DIN ISO 9001. Osnabrück Osnabrück certificeerd kwaliteitsborgingssys- tión de calidad, certificado conforme
teem conform DIN ISO 9001. G. Kromschröder AG a la norma DIN ISO 9001.
G. Kromschröder AG Osnabrück
Osnabrück G. Kromschröder AG G. Kromschröder AG
Osnabrück Osnabrück
Druckregler mit Nullabschluß bei Governor with zero shut-off at closing Régulateur de pression à étanchéité Drukregelaar met nulafsluiting bij Stabilizzatore sullo zero con pressio- Regulador de presión con bloqueo
Schließdruck; Klasse A, Gruppe 2 pressure; class A, group 2 to EN 88 totale à la fermeture ; classe A, sluitdruk; klasse A, groep 2 volgens ne di chiusura; classe A, gruppo 2 ai cero a la presión de cierre; clase A,
nach EN 88 Suitable for natural gas, town gas, groupe 2 selon EN 88 EN 88 sensi della EN 88 grupo 2 según EN 88
Für Erdgas, Stadtgas und Flüssig- LPG (gaseous) and biologically pro- Conviennent pour le gaz naturel, le Geschikt voor aardgas, stadsgas, Adatto per metano, gas di città, gas Para gas natural, gas ciudad, GLP
gas (gasförmig) und Biogas duced methane gaz de ville, le GPL (sous forme ga- LPG (gasvormig) en biogas liquido (gasiforme) e biogas (gaseoso) y biogas
Als Sonderausführung GDJ für Luft Also a special version GDJ for air zeuse) et le biogaz Als speciale uitvoering GDJ voor In versione speciale GDJ per aria Versión especial GDJ para aire
Version GDJ spéciale pour air lucht
Umgebungstemperatur: Ambient temperature: Temperatura ambiente: Temperatura ambiente:
-20 °C bis + 70 °C -20°C to +70°C Température ambiante : Omgevingstemperatuur: -20 °C a +70 °C -20°C hasta +70°C
Max. Eingangsdruck: pe max.: Max. inlet pressure: pe max.: -20°C à +70°C -20 °C tot +70 °C Massima pressione d’ingresso: Presión máx. de entrada: pe máx.:
Angabe auf dem Typenschild. as indicated on the type label. Pression d’entrée maxi. : pe maxi. : Max. inlaatdruk: pe max.: pe max: véase placa de características.
Eingestellter Ausgangsdruck pas: Set outlet pressure pas: indiquée sur la plaque signalétique. zie gegevens op typeplaatje. riportata sulla targhetta. Presión de salida ajustada pas:
Angabe auf dem Typenschild. as indicated on the type label. Pression de sortie ajustée pas : Ingestelde uitlaatdruk pas: Pressione d’uscita impostata pas: véase placa de características.
Wir empfehlen, vor jede Anlage ei- We would recommend fitting a filter indiquée sur la plaque signalétique. zie gegevens op typeplaatje. riportata sulla targhetta. Recomendamos poner un filtro de-
nen Filter zu installieren. upstream of each installation. Nous recommandons d’installer un Wij adviseren om voor elke installatie Consigliamo d’installare un filtro a lante de cada instalación.
filtre en amont de chaque installation. een filter te plaatsen. monte di ogni impianto.

Druckregler in die Fitting governor into Montage du régulateur Inbouw drukregelaar in Montaggio dello stabiliz- Instalación del regulador
Rohrleitung einbauen pipework de pression dans la de leiding zatore di pressione nella de presión en la tubería
 Verschlußkappen entfernen.  Remove screw caps. tuyauterie  Verwijder de afsluitkappen. tubazione  Quite los tapones protectores.
 Durchflußrichtung beachten: Pfei-  The direction of the gas flow must  Oter les capuchons.  Let op de doorstroomrichting: zie  Togliere i tappi.  El sentido de flujo del gas debe
le am Gehäuse. coincide with the arrows on the  Montage dans le sens de la flèche pijlen op huis.  Il gas deve fluire nella direzione in- coincidir con el de las flechas si-
 Gasleitungen müssen innen sau- housing. (située sur le boîtier) indiquant le  Gasleidingen moeten van binnen dicata dalle freccie sul corpo. tuadas en el cuerpo.
ber sein.  The gas pipes must be clean in- sens de circulation du gaz. schoon zijn.  Le tubazioni di gas debbono es-  El interior de las tuberías de gas
 In senkrechte und waagereche side.  Les conduites de gaz doivent être  In verticale en horizontale leiding: sere internamente pulite. debe estar limpio.
Rohrleitung: Einbau beliebig.  Into vertical and horizontal pipe- propres à l’intérieur. inbouw in iedere gewenste posi-  Tubazione verticale e orizzontale:  En tuberías verticales y horizonta-
 Das Gehäuse darf kein Mauer- work: fitting arbitrary.  En position verticale et horizontale : tie. montaggio in qualsiasi posizione. les: montaje en cualquier posi-
werk berühren, Mindestabstand  The housing must not touch its toutes positions.  Het huis mag niet in contact ko-  Il corpo non deve venire a contat- ción.
20 mm. surrounding walls – min. dis-  L’appareil doit être monté sans men met metselwerk, minimale to con la muratura: distanza mini-  El aparato no debe estar en
 Zugelassenes Dichtmaterial ver- tance: 20 mm. contact avec le bâtiment à une afstand: 20 mm. ma 20 mm. contacto con paredes, separa-
wenden.  Use approved jointing com- distance de 20 mm mini.  Toegelaten dichtmateriaal gebrui-  Utilizzare il materiale sigillante am- ción mínima: 20 mm.
 Beim Einbau darf kein Dichtmate- pounds.  Utiliser du matériel d’étoupage ap- ken. messo allo scopo.  Utilice material sellante permitido.
rial in die Gasleitung gelangen.  No jointing compound should be proprié.  Zorg ervoor dat er tijdens het in-  Nessun materiale sigillante deve  Al efectuar la instalación, no debe
 Passenden Schraubenschlüssel allowed to enter the gas pipe  Il faut s’assurer qu’aucun matériel bouwen geen dichtmateriaal in penetrare nella tubazione del gas penetrar material sellante en el in-
verwenden – Federdom nicht als when fitting the governor. d’étoupage ne puisse entrer dans de gasleiding terechtkomt. durante il montaggio. terior de la tubería de gas.
Hebel benutzen!  Do not use spring retaining dome la conduite de gaz pendant  Gebruik passende steeksleutel –  Utilizzare una chiave per dadi  Emplee la llave adecuada – ¡no
as lever, always use an appropri- l’installation. gebruik veerhuis niet als hef- adatta. Non utilizzare il contenito- use como palanca el domo que
ate spanner!  Utiliser les clés de serrage adé- boom! re della molla come leva! aloja la muelle!
quates – ne pas utiliser le dôme de
ressort comme levier !

Dichtheit prüfen Check for tightness Contrôle d’étanchéité Controle op lekkages Controllo della tenuta Prueba de estanquidad
Auch nach Wartung. Also after maintenance. Même après l’entretien. Ook na onderhoudswerkzaamhe- Anche dopo la manutenzione. También después del mantenimien-
 Druckregler unter Druck setzen.  Apply pressure.  Mettre le régulateur de pression den.  Mettere lo stabilizzatore in pres- to.
Eingang: 1,1 x pe max. Inlet: 1,1 x pe max. sous pression :  Zet de drukregelaar onder druk. sione  Someta a presión el regulador:
Ausgang: 1,1 x pas max. Outlet: 1,1 x pas max. En amont : 1,1 x pe max. Inlaat: 1,1 x pe max. Ingresso: 1,1 x pe max. Entrada: 1,1 x pe máx.
(siehe Federtabelle). (see spring table). En aval : 1,1 x pas max. Uitlaat: 1,1 x pas max. Uscita: 1,1 x pas max. Salida: 1,1 x pas máx.
 Der Eingangsdruck muß immer  The inlet pressure must always be (voir table des ressorts) (zie veertabel). (vedi Tabella delle molle). (ver tabla de muelles).
größer als der Ausgangsdruck higher than the outlet pressure.  La pression d’entrée doit toujours  De inlaatdruk moet altijd groter  La pressione d’ingresso deve es-  La presión de entrada debe ser
sein.  Use soap solution to check for être supérieure à la pression de dan de uitlaatdruk zijn. sere sempre superiore alla pres- siempre mayor a la presión de sa-
 Rohrenden abseifen. leaks at ends of pipe. sortie.  Kontroleer pijpeinden d.m.v. een sione d’uscita. lida.
 Vérifier les extrémités des tubes zeepoplossing op lekkages.  Trattare le estremità dei tubi con  Aplique agua jabonosa en las
avec de l’eau savonneuse. sapone. conexiones con la tubería.

Ausgangsdruck pas Change outlet Changer la pression de Wijzigen van de Cambio della pressione
umstellen pressure pas sortie pas uitlaatdruk pas d’uscita pas Reajuste de la presión
J78 R, GDJ 15 J78 R, GDJ 15 J78 R, GDJ 15 J78 R, GDJ 15 J78 R, GDJ 15 de salida pas
 Ausgangsdruck messen.  Measure outlet pressure.  Mesurer la pression de sortie.  Meet de uitlaatdruk.  Misurare la pressione d’uscita. J78 R, GDJ 15
 Verschlußkappe abschrauben.  Unscrew screw cap.  Dévisser le capuchon.  Schroef de afsluitkap eraf.  Svitare il tappo.  Medir la presión de salida.
 Sollwertsteller mit Schraubendre-  Turn setpoint adjuster by means  Tourner l’ajusteur de consigne au  Verdraai de instelschroef van de  Girare la vite regolazione molla  Desenroscar la caperuza de cierre.
her drehen: of screwdriver: moyen d’un tournevis : veer met een schroevedraaier: con una chiave a tubo:  Con un destornillador girar el
 Im Uhrzeigersinn:  Clockwise:  En vissant :  Rechtsom:  In senso orario: ajustador de valor nominal:
Ausgangsdruck höher outlet pressure increases. la pression de sortie augmente. hogere uitlaatdruk. aumento della pressione d’uscita.  Hacia la derecha:
Gegen Uhrzeigersinn: Anti-clockwise: En dévissant : Linksom: In senso antiorario: aumenta la presión de salida.
Ausgangsdruck niedriger. outlet pressure decreases. la pression de sortie diminue. lagere uitlaatdruk. diminuzione della pressione Hacia la izquierda:
d’uscita. disminuye la presión de salida.

-2-
 Eingestellten Wert des Aus-  Clearly mark the set outlet pres-  Marquer distinctement la valeur  Noteer de ingestelde uitlaatdruk  Riportare chiaramente sulla tar-  Marcar claramente en el regula-
gangsdrucks deutlich auf dem sure value on the governor. ajustée de la pression de sortie sur duidelijk op de regelaar. ghetta dello stabilizzatore il valore dor el valor al cual ajustó la pre-
Regler vermerken.  Screw screw cap tight. le régulateur.  Plaats de afsluitkap en schroef della pressione d’uscita. sión de salida.
 Verschlußkappe dicht aufschrau-  Bien visser le capucho deze weer vast.  Avvitare ermeticamente il tappo.  Enrosque fuertemente la caperu-
ben. za de cierre.
If the required outlet pressure
Läßt sich der gewünschte cannot be adjusted by means of Si la pression de sortie désirée Indien de gewenste uitlaatdruk Se non è possibile regolare la Si la presión de salida no se
Ausgangsdruck mit der the spring fitted: n’est pas obtenue avec le niet met de ingebouwde veer pressione d’uscita con la molla puede ajustar al valor deseado
eingebauten Feder nicht ressort installé : kan worden ingesteld: installata: con la muelle instalada:
einstellen:  Choose a spring from the table
 Feder entsprechend dem Aus- according to the outlet pressure  Choisir un ressort sur la table,  Kies afhankelijk van de uitlaatdruk  Scegliere una molla sulla tabella  De acuerdo al rango de presiones
gangsdruckbereich aus der Fe- range. conforme à la gamme de pres- de passende veer aan de hand in funzione della pressione d’usci- de salida escoja de la tabla de
dertabelle auswählen.  Fully unscrew setpoint adjuster. sions de sortie. van de veertabel. ta. muelles aquella que resulte ade-
 Sollwertsteller ganz herausdre-  Remove spring.  Dévisser complètement l’ajusteur  Draai de instelschroef van de veer  Svitare completamente la vite re- cuada.
hen.  Insert new spring – take label de consigne. er helemaal uit. golazione molla.  Destornillar completamente el
 Feder herausnehmen. from the kit bag and stick it below  Oter le ressort.  Verwijder de veer.  Togliere la molla. ajustador de valor nominal.
 Neue Feder einsetzen – Aufkleber the type label on the governor!  Insérer le nouveau ressort – pren-  Plaats een nieuwe veer – neem  Inserire la nuova molla. Togliere  Extrair la muelle.
aus dem Verpackungsbeutel  Screw setpoint adjuster back in. dre l’étiquette autocollante du bovendien de sticker uit het zakje l’etichetta adesiva dalla bustina  Insertar la nueva muelle – ¡despe-
nehmen und unter das Typen-  Set desired outlet pressure as sachet et la coller au-dessous de en plak deze onder het typeplaat- kit e applicarla sotto la targhetta gue la etiqueta que viene en la
schild des Druckreglers kleben! above. la plaque signalétique du régula- je van de drukregelaar. dello stabilizzatore. bolsa y péguela debajo de la pla-
 Sollwertsteller wieder eindrehen.  Replace screw cap (with sealing teur !  Draai de instelschroef van de veer  Riavvitare la vite regolazione ca de características del regula-
 Gewünschten Ausgangsdruck ring) and tighten manually.  Resserrer l’ajusteur de consigne. er weer in. molla. dor de presión!
einstellen wie oben.  Régler la pression de sortie dé-  Stel de gewenste uitlaatdruk op  Regolare la pressione d’uscita  Atornillar el ajustador de valor no-
 Verschlußkappe (mit Dichtungs- sirée, comme indiqué ci-dessus. de hierboven beschreven wijze in. desiderata come sopra. minal.
ring) wieder aufsetzen und von  Remettre le capuchon (avec ba-  Plaats de afsluitkap (met af-  Rimettere il tappo (con anello di  Regular la presión de salida al va-
Hand festziehen. gue d’étanchéité) et le serrer ma- dichtingsring) weer en zet de af- guarnizione) in sede e stringere lor requerido siguiendo las indica-
nuellement. sluitkap met de hand vast. manualmente. ciones anteriores.
 Retornar la caperuza de cierre
(con la junta de estanquidad) y
apretar con la mano.

Ausgangsdruck pas Change outlet pressure Changer la pression de Wijzigen van de Cambio della pressione Reajuste de la presión
umstellen pas sortie pas uitlaatdruk pas d’uscita pas de salida pas
GDJ 20 ... 50 GDJ 20 ... 50 GDJ 20 ... 50 GDJ 20 ... 50 GDJ 20 ... 50 GDJ 20 ... 50
 Ausgangsdruck messen.  Measure outlet pressure.  Mesurer la pression de sortie.  Meet de uitlaatdruk.  Misurare la pressione d’uscita.  Medir la presión de salida.
 Verschlußkappe abziehen.  Remove screw cap.  Retirer le capuchon.  Neem de afsluitkap af.  Togliere il tappo.  Quitar la caperuza de cierre.
 Sollwertsteller mit Schraubendre-  Turn setpoint adjuster using a  Tourner l’ajusteur de consigne  Verdraai de instelschroef van de  Girare la vite regolazione molla  Con un destornillador girar el
her drehen: screwdriver. avec un tournevis. veer met een schroevedraaier: con un cacciavite: ajustador de valor nominal:
 Im Uhrzeigersinn: Ausgangs-  Clockwise: outlet pressure in-  En vissant: la pression de sortie  Rechtsom: hogere uitlaatdruk.  In senso orario: aumento della  Hacia la derecha: aumenta la pre-
druck höher. creases. augmente.  Linksom: lagere uitlaatdruk. pressione d’uscita sión de salida.
 Gegen Uhrzeigersinn: Ausgangs-  Anti-clockwise: outlet pressure  En dévisssant : la pression de  Noteer de ingestelde uitlaatdruk  In senso antiorario: diminuzione  Hacia la izquierda: disminuye la
druck niedriger. decreases. sortie diminue. duidelijk op de regelaar. della pressione d’uscita presión de salida.
 Eingestellten Wert des Aus-  Clearly mark the set outlet pres-  Marquer clairement la valeur  Afsluitkap weer terugplaatsen.  Riportare chiaramente sulla tar-  Marcar claramente en el regula-
gangsdruckes deutlich auf dem sure value on the governor. réglée de la pression de sortie sur ghetta dello stabilizzatore il valore dor el valor ajustado de presión
Regler vermerken.  Replace screw cap. le régulateur. Indien de gewenste uitlaatdruk della pressione d’uscita. de salida.
 Verschlußkappe wieder auf-  Remboîter le capuchon. niet met de ingebouwde veer  Rimettere di nuovo il tappo.  Retornar la caperuza de cierre.
stecken. 1 If the required outlet pressure kan worden ingesteld:
cannot be adjusted by means of Si la pression de sortie ne peut  Kies afhankelijk van de uitlaatdruk Se non è possibile regolare la Si la presión de salida no se
Läßt sich der Ausgangsdruck the fitted spring: pas être réglée à l’aide du de passende veer aan de hand pressione d’uscita con la molla puede ajustar al valor deseado
mit der eingebauten Feder nicht  Choose a spring from the table ressort en place : van de veertabel. installata: con la muelle instalada:
einstellen: according to the outlet pressure  Choisir un ressort sur le table des  Draai de instelschroef van de veer  Selezionare una molla sulla tabel-  De acuerdo al rango de presiones
 Feder entsprechend dem Aus- range. ressorts correspondant à la gam- linksom tot aan de aanslag. la in funzione della pressione de salida escoja de la tabla de
gangsdruckbereich aus der Fe-  Turn setpoint adjuster anti-clock- me de pressions de sortie.  Vergrendellip 1 optillen, vasthou- d’uscita. muelles aquella que resulte ade-
dertabelle auswählen. wise as far as it will go.  Tourner l’ajusteur de consigne en den en snelspansysteem 2 naar  Girare in senso antiorario la vite cuada.
 Sollwertsteller gegen den Uhrzei- 2  Lift locking lever 1, hold and turn dévissant, jusqu’en butée. links draaien. regolazione molla, fino al fermo.  Girar el ajustador de valor nomi-
gersinn drehen bis zum An- self-aligning bearing 2 anti-clock-  Soulever le levier de blocage 1, le  Snelspansysteem 2 wegnemen.  Sollevare leva 1, mantenere in nal hacia la izquierda hasta el to-
schlag. wise. maintenir et tourner le palier de  Veer weghalen. posizione e girare il cuscinetto di pe.
 Sperrhebel 1 anheben, festhalten  Remove self-aligning bearing 2. réglage 2 vers la gauche.  Plaats een nieuwe veer – neem regolazione 2 verso sinistra.  Levantar la palanca de bloqueo
und Einstellager 2 nach links dre-  Remove spring.  Enlever le palier de réglage 2. bovendien de sticker uit het zakje  Togliere il cuscinetto di regolazio- 1, retenerla y girar el rodamiento
hen.  Insert new spring – take label  Enlever le ressort. en plak deze onder het typeplaat- ne 2. orientable 2 hacia la izquierda.
 Einstellager 2 herausziehen. from the kit bag and stick it below  Mettre le nouveau ressort en je van de drukregelaar.  Togliere la molla.  Quitar el rodamiento orientable 2.
 Feder herausnehmen. the type label on the governor! place. Enlever l’étiquette auto-  Inserire la nuova molla – togliere  Quitar la muelle.
 Neue Feder einsetzen – Aufkleber collante du sachet et la coller au- l’etichetta adesiva dalla bustina  Insertar la nueva muelle – ¡despe-
aus dem Verpackungsbeutel dessous la plaque signalétique kit e applicarla sotto la targhetta gue la etiqueta que viene en la
nehmen und unter das Typen- du régulateur. dello stabilizzatore. bolsa y péguela debajo de la pla-
schild des Druckreglers kleben. ca de características del regula-
dor de presión!
 Einstellager 2 auf die Feder set-  Place self-aligning bearing 2 on  Placer le palier de réglage 2 sur le  Snelspansysteem 2 op de veer  Mettere il cuscinetto di regolazio-  Colocar el rodamiento orientable 2
zen und bis zum Anschlag in den spring and press into spring ressort et l’enfoncer dans le zetten en tot voor de aanslag in ne 2 sulla molla e premerlo sul sobre la muelle y apretarlo hasta el
Federdom eindrücken. dome as far as it will go. dôme de ressort jusqu’en butée. het veerhuis duwen. contenitore della molla fino al fer- tope en el domo que aloja la
 Einstellager 2 im Uhrzeigersinn  Turn self-aligning bearing 2 clock-  Tourner le palier de réglage 2  Snelspansysteem 2 rechtsom mo. muelle.
drehen bis Sperrhebel 1 wieder wise until locking lever 1 engages dans le sens des aiguilles d’une draaien tot dat de vergrendellip 1  Girare il cuscinetto di regolazione  Girar el rodamiento orientable 2 hacia
einrastet. again. montre jusqu’à ce que le levier de weer vastklikt. 2 in senso orario fino all’aggancio la derecha hasta que la palanca de
 Gewünschten Ausgangsdruck  Set desired outlet pressure as blocage 1 se réenclenche.  Stel de gewenste uitlaatdruk op della leva 1. bloqueo se enclave nuevamente 1.
einstellen wie oben. above.  Régler la pression de sortie dé- de hierboven beschreven wijze in.  Regolare la pressione d’uscita  Regular la presión de salida al valor
 Verschlußkappe wieder auf-  Replace screw cap. sirée, comme indiqué ci-dessus.  Afsluitkap weer terugplaatsen. desiderata come sopra. requerido siguiendo las indicacio-
stecken.  Remboîter le capuchon.  Rimettere il tappo. nes anteriores.
 Retornar la caperuza de cierre.

Der Druckregler ist Gas governors require Les régulateurs sont De drukregelaar is Lo stabilizzatore di ¡El regulador de presión no
wartungsfrei! no maintenance! sans entretien ! onderhoudsvrij! pressione non richiede di requiere mantenimiento!
Zu empfehlen ist eine Funktionsprü- We recommend a function check Nous recommandons de procéder à Aanbevolen wordt, de werking 1 x manutenzione! Se recomienda realizar un control del
fung einmal im Jahr. once a year. une vérification du fonctionnement per jaar te controleren. Si consiglia l’esecuzione di un con- funcionamiento una vez al año.
une fois par an. trollo del funzionamento una volta
Beim Betrieb mit Biogas ist eine If operated with biologically pro- Bij gebruik met biogas adviseren wij l'anno. Si se opera con biogas se debe llevar
halbjährliche Wartung vorzunehmen. duced methane, a service will have En cas d'emploi de biogaz, il faut een halfjaarlijks onderhoud. a cabo la labor de mantenimiento ca-
to be carried out every six months. faire un entretien tous les six mois. Operando con biogas è necessaria da seis meses.
una verifica ogni sei mesi.

Federtabelle Ausgangsdruck Kennzeichnung Marking Couleur Kleurcode Colore Color D d L Windungen

Spring table D Outlet pressure Coils
d Pression de sortie Spirale
Table des ressorts Uitlaatdruk Windingen
Pressione d’uscita Avvolgimenti
Veertabel Presión de salida mm mm mm Espiras
Tabella delle molle mbar
Tabla de muelles J78 R 15 6– 9 dunkelgrün/rot dark green/red vert foncé /rouge donkergroen/rood verde scuro/rosso verde oscuro/rojo 21.8 1.20 40.31 2.5
9– 17 gelb yellow jaune geel giallo amarillo 21.84 1.22 42.06 10
L 15 – 23 schwarz black noir zwart nero negro 21.84 1.22 53.18 11.5
22 – 31 orange orange orange oranje arancione naranja 21.84 1.22 63.5 11
31 – 42 braun brown brun bruin marrone marrón 21.95 1.32 65.09 10.5
42 55 hellgrün/hellblau light green/light blue vert clair/bleu clair lichtblauw/lichtgroen verde chiaro/blu chiaro verde claro/azul claro 20.92 1.42 40 6.5

GDJ 15 2– 16 gelb yellow jaune geel giallo amarillo 21.84 1.22 42.06 10
10 – 20 schwarz black noir zwart nero negro 21.84 1.22 53.18 11.5
16 – 28 orange orange orange oranje arancione naranja 21.84 1.22 63.5 11
22 – 40 braun brown brun bruin marrone marrón 21.95 1.32 65.09 10.5
40 – 55 hellgrün/hellblau light green/light blue vert clair/bleu clair lichtblauw/lichtgroen verde chiaro/blu chiaro verde claro/azul claro 20.92 1.42 40 6.5

GDJ 20 5– 15 gelb yellow jaune geel giallo amarillo 35.83 1.83 68 10.5
25 12,5 – 25 schwarz black noir zwart nero negro 36.03 2.03 76 11
22,5 – 35 orange orange orange oranje arancione naranja 35.93 1.93 101 12
25 – 75 gelb/schwarz yellow/black jaune/noir geel/zwart giallo/nero amarillo/negro 35.84 2.34 67.5 5.5
70 – 100 pink/gold pink/gold rose/or pink/goud rosa/oro rojo/oro 35.96 2.46 80 7
90 – 160 gelb/orange yellow/orange jaune/orange geel/oranje giallo/arancione amarillo/naranja 36.29 2.79 74 5.25

GDJ 40 5– 15 rot/gelb red/yellow rouge/jaune rood/geel rosso/giallo rojo/amarillo 36.18 2.18 84 12.5
12,5 – 25 rot/schwarz red/black rouge/noir rood/zwart rosso/nero rojo/negro 36.34 2.34 89 10.5
22,5 – 35 rot/orange red/orange rouge/orange rood/oranje rosso/arancione rojo/naranja 36.34 2.34 119 12
25 – 75 gelb/orange yellow/orange jaune/orange geel/oranje giallo/arancione amarillo/naranja 36.29 2.79 74 5.25
70 – 100 pink/silber pink/silver rose/argent pink/zilver rosa/argento rosa/plata 36.7 2.8 100 7
90 – 160 grau/gold grey/gold gris/or grijs/goud grigio/oro gris/oro 36.5 3.0 98 5.75

GDJ 50 5– 15 dunkelblau/gelb dark blue/yellow bleu foncé/jaune donkerblauw/geel blu scuro/giallo azul oscuro/amarillo 36.64 2.64 80 10.5
12,5 – 25 dunkelblau/schwarz dark blue/black bleu foncé/noir donkerblauw/zwart blu scuro/nero azul oscuro/negro 36.64 2.64 90 10
22,5 – 35 dunkelblau/orange dark blue/orange bleu foncé/orange donkerblauw/oranje blu scuro/arancione azul oscuro/naranja 36.64 2.64 118 11
25 – 75 gelb/dunkelgrün yellow/dark green jaune/vert foncé geel/donkergroen giallo/verde scuro amarillo/verde oscuro 36.5 3 86.5 5.8
70 – 100 grau/gold grey/gold gris/or grijs/goud grigio/oro gris/oro 36.5 3 98 5.75

Technische Änderungen, die dem We reserve the right to make techni- Sous réserve de modifications tech- Technische wijzigingen ter verbete- Salvo modifiche tecniche per miglio- Se reserva el derecho a realizar mo-
Fortschritt dienen, vorbehalten. cal modifications in the interests of niques visant à améliorer nos pro- ring van onze producten voorbehou- rie. dificaciones técnicas que contri-
progress. duits. den. buyan al progreso.

Further support is available from Pour toute assistance, vous pouvez Verdere ondersteuning krijgt u bij de Per maggiori informazioni rivolgersi Puede recibir soporte adicional en la
your local branch office/agent. The également contacter votre agence/ plaatselijke vestiging/vertegenwoor- alla filiale/rappresentanza compe- sucursal / representación que a Ud.
addresses are available on the Inter- représentation la plus proche dont diging. Het adres is op het internet tente. L’indirizzo è disponibile su In- le corresponda. La dirección la pue-
net or from G. Kromschröder AG, l’adresse est disponible sur Internet te vinden of u wendt zich tot ternet o può essere richiesto alla de obtener en Internet o a través de
Osnabrück. ou auprès de la société G. Krom- G. Kromschröder AG in Osnabrück. G. Kromschröder AG, Osnabrück. la empresa G. Kromschröder AG,
schröder AG, Osnabrück. Osnabrück.

-4-
03250199 04.01 Fx/ivd 63.000

4.1.1.4 Edition 8.01

D DK S N P GR GB F NL I E
➔ www.kromschroeder.de
Gas-Druckwächter Pressure switch for Pressostat pour gaz Gas-drukschakelaar Pressostati per gas Presostato de gas
DG gas DG DG DG DG DG
Betriebsanleitung Operating instructions Instructions de service Bedieningsvoorschrift Istruzioni d’uso Instrucciones de utili-
● Bitte lesen und aufbewahren ● Please read and keep in a safe ● A lire attentivement et à con- ● Lezen en goed bewaren a.u.b. ● Si prega di leggere e zación
place server conservare ● Se ruega que las lean y con-
serven
Zeichenerklärung Explanation of symbols Légendes Legenda Spiegazione dei simboli Explicación de símbolos
●, 1, 2, 3... = Tätigkeit ●, 1, 2, 3 ... = Action ●, 1, 2, 3... = action ●, 1, 2, 3... = werkzaamheden ●, 1, 2, 3... = Operazione ●, 1, 2, 3... = Actividad
➔ = Hinweis ➔ = Instruction ➔ = remarque ➔ = aanwijzing ➔ = Avvertenza ➔ = Indicación
Toutes les actions mentionnées
Alle in dieser Betriebsanleitung All the work set out in these dans les présentes instructions Alle in deze bedrijfshandleiding Tutte le operazioni indicate nelle ¡Todas las actividades indicadas
aufgeführten Tätigkeiten dürfen operating instructions may only de service doivent être exécutées vermelde werkzaamheden mo- presenti istruzioni d’uso devono en estas Instrucciones de utiliza-
nur von autorisiertem Fachper- be completed by authorised par des spécialistes formés et gen alleen door technici worden essere eseguite soltanto dal pre- ción, sólo deben realizarse por
sonal ausgeführt werden! trained personnel! autorisés uniquement ! uitgevoerd! posto esperto autorizzato. una persona formada y autorizada!
WARNUNG! Unsachgemäßer Ein- WARNING! Incorrect installation, ATTENTION ! Un montage, un ré- WAARSCHUWING! Ondeskundi- ATTENZIONE! Se montaggio, re- ¡ADVERTENCIA! La instalación,
bau, Einstellung, Veränderung, adjustment, modification, operation glage, une modification, une utilisa- ge inbouw, instelling, wijziging, golazione, modifica, utilizzo o manu- ajuste, modificación, manejo o man-
Bedienung oder Wartung kann or maintenance may cause injury tion ou un entretien inadaptés ris- bediening of onderhoudswerkzaam- tenzione non vengono eseguiti tenimiento incorrecto puede oca-
Verletzungen oder Sachschäden or material damage. quent d’engendrer des dommages heden kunnen persoonlijk letsel of correttamente, possono verificarsi sionar daños personales o mate-
verursachen. Read the instructions before use. matériels ou corporels. materiële schade veroorzaken. infortuni o danni. riales.
Anleitung vor dem Gebrauch lesen. This unit must be installed in ac- Lire les instructions avant utilisation. Aanwijzingen voor het gebruik lezen. Si prega di leggere le istruzioni Leer las instrucciones antes de
Dieses Gerät muß nach den gelten- cordance with the regulations in Cet appareil doit être installé en res- Dit apparaat moet overeenkomstig prima di utilizzare il prodotto che usar. Este dispositivo debe ser
den Vorschriften installiert werden. force. pectant les règlements en vigueur. de geldende regels worden dovrà venire installato in base alle instalado observando las normati-
geïnstalleerd. normative vigenti. vas en vigor.

Konformitäts- EC certificate of Attestation de Certificaat van Dichiarazione di Certificado de

bescheinigung conformity conformité overeenstemming conformità conformidad
Wir erklären als Hersteller, daß die We, the manufacturer, hereby de- En tant que fabricant, nous décla- Wij verklaren als fabrikant dat de Dichiariamo in qualità di produttori Nosotros, el fabricante, declaramos
Produkte DG.., gekennzeichnet mit clare that the products DG.., marked rons que les produits DG.., identi- producten DG.., gemerkt met het che i prodotti DG.., contrassegnati que los productos DG.., marcados
der Produkt-ID-Nr. CE 0085AP0467 with product ID No. CE 0085AP0467, fiés par le numéro de produit CE product-identificatienummer CE con il numero di identificazione del con el nº de identificación de pro-
die grundlegenden Anforderungen comply with the essential require- 0085AP0467, répondent aux exigen- 0085AP0467, aan de fundamentele prodotto CE 0085AP0467, rispon- ducto CE 0085AP0467, cumplen
folgender Richtlinien erfüllen: ments of the following Directives: ces essentielles des directives sui- voorschriften van de volgende dono ai requisiti essenziali posti dalle con los requisitos básicos de las
– 90/396/EWG in Verbindung mit – 90/396/EEC in conjunction with vantes : richtlijnen voldoen: direttive seguenti: siguientes Directivas:
EN 1854 Teil 1, D-49018 Osnabrück, Germany EN 1854, Part I, – 90/396/CEE en association avec – 90/396/EEG in combinatie met – 90/396/CEE in unione con – 90/396/CEE en relación con
– 73/23/EWG in Verbindung mit den DG
– 73/23/EEC in conjunction with the EN 1854, partie 1, EN 1854, deel 1, EN 1854, Parte 1, EN 1854, Parte 1,
einschlägigen Normen. relevant standards. – 73/23/CEE en association avec – 73/23/EEG in combinatie met de – 73/23/CEE in unione con le norme – 73/23/CEE en relación con las
Die entsprechend bezeichneten Pro- CE – 0085AP0467 The relevant products correspond to les normes pertinentes. toepasselijke normen. pertinenti. normas pertinentes.
dukte stimmen überein mit dem bei the type tested by the notified body Les produits désignés en conséquen- De overeenkomstig geïdentificeerde I prodotti con tale contrassegno Los productos denominados de la forma
der zugelassenen Stelle 0085 geprüf- 2 0085. ce sont conformes au type éprouvé producten komen overeen met het corrispondono al tipo esaminato arriba mencionada son conformes con el
3
ten Baumuster. 1 Comprehensive quality assurance is à l’organisme notifié 0085. door de aangewezen instantie 0085 dall’organismo notificato 0085. modelo de construcción ensayado por el
Eine umfassende Qualitätssicherung guaranteed by a certified Quality Sys- Une assurance de la qualité complè- gecontroleerde type. La sicurezza della qualità è garantita respectivo Organismo Notificado 0085.
ist gewährleistet durch ein zertifi- tem pursuant to DIN EN ISO 9001 te est garantie par un système qua- Een uitgebreide kwaliteitsborging wordt da un sistema di management della El exhaustivo control de calidad está
ziertes Qualiätsmanagementsystem according to annex II, paragraph 3 lité certifié selon DIN EN ISO 9001, gegarandeerd door een gecertificeerd qualità ai sensi della DIN EN ISO garantizado por un sistema de gestión
nach DIN EN ISO 9001 gemäß of Directive 90/396/EEC. conformément à l’annexe II, paragra- kwaliteitsborgingssysteem conform DIN 9001, in base all’appendice II, decalidad,certificadoconformealanorma
Anhang II Absatz 3 der Richtlinie G. Kromschröder AG, Osnabrück phe 3, de la directive 90/396/CEE. EN ISO 9001 overeenkomstig bijlage II, comma 3 della direttiva DIN EN ISO 9001 según el Anexo
90/396/EWG. G. Kromschröder AG, Osnabrück lid 3 van de richtlijn 90/396/EEG. 90/396/CEE. II, Párrafo 3 de la Directiva 90/396/CEE.
G. Kromschröder AG, Osnabrück G. Kromschröder AG, Osnabrück G. Kromschröder AG, Osnabrück G. Kromschröder AG, Osnabrück

Prüfen Testing Vérifier Controleren Verificare Comprobación

➔ Netzspannung, Umgebungstem- ➔ Mains voltage, ambient tempera- ➔ la tension du secteur, la tempéra- ➔ Netspanning, omgevingstempe- ➔ tensione di rete, temperatura am- ➔ Tensión de la red, temperatura
peratur und Schutzart – siehe Ty- ture and enclosure – see type la- ture ambiante et le type de protec- ratuur en beschermingsklasse – biente e tipo di protezione – tar- ambiente y tipo de protección;
penschild. bel. tion – voir la plaque signalétique. zie typeplaatje ghetta dati véase la placa de características.
▼ ▼ ▼ ▼ ▼ ▼

-1-
DG..B DG..B DG..B DG..B DG..B DG..B
➔ Für Überdruck, Anschluss 1. 2 ➔ For positive pressure, port 1. ➔ Pour pression, raccord 1. ➔ Voor overdruk, aansluiting 1. ➔ Per sovrapressione, collegamento ➔ Para sobrepresión, conexión 1.
DG..U, DG..H, DG..N DG..U, DG..H, DG..N DG..U, DG..H, DG..N DG..U, DG..H, DG..N 1. DG..U, DG..H, DG..N
➔ Für Überdruck, Anschluss 1 oder ➔ For positive pressure, port 1 or 2, ➔ Pour pression, raccord 1 ou 2, ➔ Voor overdruk, aansluiting 1 of 2, DG..U, DG..H, DG..N ➔ Para sobrepresión, conexión 1 ó 2
2, für Gas, Luft oder Rauchgas. 1 for gas, air or flue gas. Leave port pour gaz, air ou fumées. Laisser voor gas, lucht of rookgas. Aan- ➔ Per sovrapressione, collegamento para gas, aire o gases producto de
Anschluss 3 oder 4 zur Belüftung 3 4 3 or 4 open for ventilation. le raccord 3 ou 4 ouvert pour sluiting 3 of 4 voor de luchtverver- 1 o 2, per gas, aria o fumi. Las- la combustión. Dejar abierta la co-
offen lassen. ➔ For negative pressure, port 3 or 4, l‘aération. sing open laten. ciare aperto il collegamento 3 o 4 nexión 3 ó 4 para la ventilación.
➔ Für Unterdruck, Anschluss 3 oder for air or flue gas only. Leave port ➔ Pour dépression, raccord 3 ou 4, ➔ Voor onderdruk, aansluiting 3 of per l’aerazione. ➔ Para depresión, conexión 3 ó 4,
4, nur für Luft oder Rauchgas. An- 1 or 2 open for ventilation. uniquement pour air ou fumées. 4, alleen lucht of rookgas. Aanslui- ➔ Per depressione, collegamento 3 sólo para el aire o gases producto
schluss 1 oder 2 zur Belüftung of- ➔ For differential pressure, port 1 or Laisser le raccord 1 ou 2 ouvert ting 1 of 2 voor de luchtverversing o 4, solo per aria o fumi. Lasciare de la combustión. Dejar abierta la
fen lassen. 2, and 3 or 4, for air or flue gas pour l‘aération. open laten. aperto il collegamento 1 o 2 per conexión 1 ó 2 para la ventilación.
➔ Für Differenzdruck, Anschluss 1 only. Seal all remaining ports. ➔ Pour pression différentielle, rac- ➔ Voor verschildruk, aansluiting 1 of l‘aerazione. ➔ Para presión diferencial, conexión 1 ó
oder 2, und 3 oder 4, nur für cord 1 ou 2, et 3 ou 4, unique- 2 en 3 of 4, alleen lucht en rook- ➔ Per pressione differenziale, colle- 2, y 3 ó 4, sólo para aire o gases pro-
Luft oder Rauchgas. Freibleiben- ➔ DG..B, DG..U switch with rising ment pour air ou fumées. Obturer gas. Vrij blijvende aansluitingen gamento 1 o 2 e 3 o 4, solo per ducto de la combustión. Sellar las
de Anschlüsse dichtsetzen. pressure. les raccords libres. afsluiten. aria o fumi. Ermetizzare i collega- conexiones que queden libres.
➔ DG..H switches and locks off with menti restanti.
➔ DG..B, DG..U schalten bei stei- rising pressure – with manual reset. ➔ DG..B, DG..U activés lorsque la ➔ DG..B, DG..U schakelen bij stij- ➔ DG..B, DG..U conectan con la
gendem Druck. ➔ DG..N switches and locks off with pression monte. gende druk. ➔ DG..B, DG..U commutano quan- presión ascendente.
➔ DG..H schaltet und verriegelt bei falling pressure – with manual reset. ➔ DG..H activé et verrouillé lorsque ➔ DG..H schakelt en vergrendelt bij do la pressione è in aumento. ➔ DG..H conecta y bloquea con la
steigendem Druck – mit Handrück- ➔ Fit an upstream restrictor if the la pression monte – avec mise à stijgende druk en kan met de ➔ DG..H commuta e si blocca presión ascendente con rearme
stellung. system is subject to greatly l’état initial à main. hand worden teruggezet. quando la pressione è in manual.
➔ DG..N schaltet und verriegelt bei fluctuating pressures. (See ➔ DG..N activé et verrouillé lorsque ➔ DG..N schakelt en vergrendelt bij aumento – con ripristino manuale. ➔ DG..N conecta y bloquea con la
fallendem Druck – mit Handrück- accessories). la pression chute – avec mise à dalende druk en kan met de hand ➔ DG..N commuta e si blocca presión descendente con rearme
stellung. ➔ The service life will be shorter if l’état initial à main. worden teruggezet. quando la pressione è in diminu- manual.
➔ Bei stark schwankenden Drücken subject to ozone concentrations ➔ En cas de pression très instable, ➔ Bij sterk schommelende druk zione – con ripristino manuale. ➔ En sistemas con presiones os-
Vordrossel einbauen. (Siehe Zube- exceeding 200 µg/m3. installer un obturateur primaire. een voorrestrictie inbouwen (zie ➔ In caso di pressione molto instabile cilantes, montar el estrangulador
hör) (Voir Accessoires) toebehoren). montare una valvola di ingresso previo. (Véanse los accesorios).
➔ Bei Ozonbelastung über 200 µg/m3 ➔ Si la quantité d’ozone est supé- ➔ Ozonbelasting boven 200 µg/m3 (vedi Accessori). ➔ Con concentraciones de ozono
verringert sich die Lebensdauer. rieure à 200 µg/m3, la durée de verkort de levensduur. ➔ In caso di carico di ozono supe- por encima de 200 µg/m3, la vida
vie est réduite. riore a 200 µg/m3 si riduce la durata. del presostato se ve reducida.

Einbauen Installation Montage Inbouwen Montaggio Montaje

➔ Einbaulage beliebig, vorzugsweise ➔ Fitting position as required, ➔ Montage au choix, de préférence ➔ Inbouwpositie willekeurig, bij ➔ Posizione di montaggio arbitraria, ➔ Posición de montaje: cualquiera,
mit senkrecht stehender Memb- preferably with diaphragm vertical, avec membrane verticale et voorkeur met verticaal staand preferibilmente con la membrana preferentemente con la membrana
rane, mit freiem Blick auf den with unobstructed view of the molette graduée bien visible. Veiller membraan, met vrije zicht op de in verticale, lasciare la possibilità en posición vertical y con fácil
Skalenring. Dabei ist zu beachten, graduated collar. Ensure that no à ce que les impuretés ou l’hu- schaalring. Daarbij dient erop te di visionare l’anello graduato. acceso a la rueda de ajuste.
dass Schmutz oder Feuchtigkeit dirt or moisture can penetrate midité ne pénètrent pas dans les worden gelet dat verontreiniging Prestare attenzione che sporco Deben evitarse los depósitos de
nicht in die zur Belüftung offenen open ventilation ports. raccords ouverts pour l’aération. of vocht niet in de ademopening o umidità non si depositino sui suciedad y la entrada de humedad
Anschlüsse gelangen kann. ➔ The housing may not contact ➔ Le boîtier ne doit toucher aucun mag komen. collegamenti aperti per l’aera- a través de las conexiones
➔ Das Gehäuse darf kein Mauer- masonry. Minimum clearance obstacle. Ecart minimal : 20 mm. ➔ Het huis mag geen muur aanra- zione. abiertas para la ventilación.
werk berühren. Mindestabstand 20 mm. ➔ Protéger le DG contre les rayons ken. Minimale afstand 20 mm. ➔ La scatola non deve essere a ➔ No debe instalarse en contacto
20 mm. ➔ Protect from direct sunlight (even de soleil (aussi en cas d’IP 65). ➔ De DG mag niet in contact komen contatto con murature. Distanza con las paredes del recinto. Dis-
➔ DG vor direkter Sonneneinstrah- with IP 65). DG..B..S met directe zonnestralen (ook bij minima 20 mm. tancia mínima de 20 mm.
lung schützen (auch bei IP 65). DG..B..S ➔ Ne pas raccorder de gaz, mais IP 65). ➔ Protettere il DG dei raggi del sole ➔ Proteger el DG de los rayos de
DG..B..S ➔ Do not connect gas but only O2 uniquement de l’O2 ou du NH3 DG..B..S (anche con IP 65). sol (también con el IP 65).
➔ Kein Gas, sondern nur O2 oder IP 65 IP 54 or NH3 to the positive pressure sur le raccord de pression 1. ➔ Geen gas maar alleen O2 of DG..B..S DG..B..S
NH3 an Überdruck-Anschluss 1 port 1. Attention : montage sans graisse. NH3 op overdruk-aansluiting 1 ➔ Non collegare gas, ma solo O2 o ➔ Emplear sólo con O2 ó NH3, para
anschließen. Ensure that no grease is used DG aansluiten. NH3 al collegamento 1 per sovra- sobrepresión, conexión 1.
Auf fettfreien Einbau achten. during installation. 1 Rincer la tuyauterie. Op vetvrije inbouw letten. pressione. Evitar restos de grasa.
DG DG 2 Utiliser un matériel d’étanchéité DG Attenzione: montare in assenza di DG
1 Rohrleitung spülen. 4 3 1 Flush the pipework. approprié. 1 Leiding spoelen. grassi. 1 Preparar la tubería.
2 Geeignetes Dichtmaterial verwen- 2 Use suitable sealing material. 3 Si des impuretés risquent de s’ac- 2 Geschikt afdichtingsmateriaal ge- DG 2 Emplear un material sellante
den. 3 If dirt can accumulate at port 3 cumuler sur le raccord 3 ou 4, uti- bruiken. 1 Lavare la tubazione. adecuado.
3 Wenn sich Schmutz am Anschluss or 4, use the filter, Order No. liser un filtre, réf. 74916199. 3 Een filter gebruiken als er zich vuil 2 Utilizzare materiale di tenuta ade- 3 Cuando en la conexión 3 ó 4 se
3 oder 4 sammeln kann, Filter ver- 74916199. 4 Monter le DG. op aansluiting 3 of 4 kan opho- guato. acumule la suciedad, deberá utili-
wenden, Bestell-Nr. 74916199. 4 Fit the DG. pen. Bestelnummer 74916199. 3 Se sul collegamento 3 o 4 si pos- zarse el filtro. Número de referen-
4 DG einbauen. 4 DG inbouwen. sono depositare sporco o umidi- cia 74916199.
tà, utilizzare un filtro – n° ordine 4 Montar el DG.
74916199.
4 Montare il DG.

-2-
DG..B, DG..H,
DG..U DG..N 2

Rp 1/4 Rp 1/4
pmax =
2
1 pmax =
600 mbar 600 mbar

3 Rp 1/8
pmax = pmax = 4
-600 mbar Rp 1/8 -600 mbar
4

∆pmax = ∆pmax =
600 mbar 600 mbar

Dichtheit prüfen Tightness test Vérifier l’étanchéité Controle op lekkage Controllo della tenuta Comprobar la
estanqueidad
DG..B, DG..H,
DG..U DG..N

N2
900 mbar
max. 2 bar
<15 min

-3-
Schaltdruck ps verstellen Adjusting the switch- Régler la pression de Schakeldruk ps Regolazione della Ajustar la presión de
1 Anlage spannungsfrei schalten. ing pressure ps commutation ps verstellen pressione di innesto ps actuación ps
1 Disconnect the system from the 1 Mettre l’installation hors tension. 1 Installatie spanningsvrij maken. 1 Togliere la tensione dall’impianto. 1 Desconectar la instalación de la
electrical power supply. alimentación eléctrica.

DG..B, DG..H,
DG..U DG..N Einstellbereich ±15 % vom Skalenwert Schaltdifferenz Differenz zwischen Schaltdruck und
möglicher Entriegelung
Adjusting range ±15 % of the scale value Switching difference Difference between switching pressure
and possible reset
Plage de réglage ±15 % de la valeur de Différence de commuta- Différence entre la pression de commu-
l’échelle tion tation et un éventuel déverrouillage
Instelbereik ±15 % van de op de schaal aan- Schakelverschil Verschil tussen schakeldruk en moge-
gegeven waarde lijke ontgrendeling
Campo di misura ±15 % del valore indicato Differenza di commuta- Differenza fra pressione di innesto ed
sulla scala zione eventuale sbloccaggio
Margen de ajuste ± 15% de la lectura mínima Diferencia de conmuta- Diferencia entre presión de conmuta-
de la escala ción ción y posible desbloqueo

[mbar] [mbar] [mbar]

DG 6B, U 0,4 – 6 0,20 – 0,3
DG 10B, U 1,0 – 10 0,25 – 0,4
DG 50B, U 2,5 – 50 0,60 – 1,5
DG 150B, U 30,0 – 150 2,50 – 5,0
DG 500B, U 100,0 – 500 8,00 – 24,0
DG 10H, N 1,0 – 10 0,4 – 1
DG 50H, N 2,5 – 50 0,4 – 2
DG 150H, N 30,0 – 150 0,4 – 4
DG 500H, N 100,0 – 500 4,0 – 17

2 3 4 5 1 3
6 7
2 NC
COM 2,5
NO NO 5 0

5
10
2 COM

45
Ω

15
NC 3

40
20
35
1 25
30

8
0

1 cm = 1 mbar

-4-
 9 10 11 12 13
DG..B,
DG..U, DG..H
2,5
5 0

5
ps

10
0
DG..H

45
15

40
Ω

20
25 35
30

DG..N 9 10 11 12 13
2,5

DG..N 5 0

>ps

5
0 0 ps

10

45
15
Ω

40
20
25 35
30

DG..B 14
DG..U,
DG..H,
DG..N

Verdrahten Wiring Câblage Bedraden Cablaggio Cableado

DG D-49018 Osnabrück, Germany DG DG DG DG DG
➔ 24–250 V~: DG ➔ 24–250 V AC: ➔ 24–250 V~: ➔ 24–250 V~: ➔ 24–250 V~ ➔ 24–250 V ca:
I = 0,05–5 A, cos ϕ = 1, I = 0.05–5 A, cos ϕ = 1, I = 0,05–5 A, cos ϕ = 1, I = 0,05–5 A, cos ϕ = 1, I = 0,05–5 A, cos ϕ = 1 I = 0,05–5 A, cos ϕ = 1,
I = 0,05–1 A, cos ϕ = 0,6; CE – 0085AP0467
I = 0.05–1 A, cos ϕ = 0.6; I = 0,05–1 A, cos ϕ = 0,6 ; I = 0,05–1 A, cos ϕ = 0,6; I = 0,05–1 A, cos ϕ = 0,6 I = 0,05–1 A, cos ϕ = 0,6;
DG..G 2
3
DG..G DG..G DG..G DG..G DG..G
➔ 12–250 V~: 1
➔ 12–250 V AC: ➔ 12–250 V~: ➔ 12–250 V~: ➔ 12–250 V~ ➔ 12–250 V ca:
I = 0,01–5 A, cos ϕ = 1, I = 0.01–5 A, cos ϕ = 1, I = 0,01–5 A, cos ϕ = 1, I = 0,01–5 A, cos ϕ = 1, I = 0,01–5 A, cos ϕ = 1 I = 0,01–5 A, cos ϕ = 1,
I = 0,01–1 A, cos ϕ = 0,6; I = 0.01–1 A, cos ϕ = 0.6; I = 0,01–1 A, cos ϕ = 0,6 ; I = 0,01–1 A, cos ϕ = 0,6; I = 0,05–1 A, cos ϕ = 0,6 I = 0,01–1 A, cos ϕ = 0.6;
12–48 V=: µ 6,3 AF, DIN 41661 12–48 V DC: 12–48 V=: 12–48 V=: 12–48 V= 12–48 V cc:
I = 0,01–1 A I = 0.1–1 A. I = 0,01–1 A. I = 0,01–1 A. I = 0,01–1 A I = 0,01–1 A.
➔ Wenn der DG..G einmal eine ➔ If the DG..G has switched a ➔ Si le DG..G est soumis une fois à ➔ Als de DG..G ooit een spanning ➔ Se il DG..G commuta una tensione ➔ Cuando el DG..G se conecta a
Spannung >24 V und einen Strom voltage > 24 V and a current une tension > 24 V et à un courant van >24 V en een stroom van > 24 V e una corrente > 0,1 A una tensión > 24 V y una corriente
>0,1 A geschaltet hat, ist die > 0.1 A once, the gold plating > 0,1 A, la couche d’or sur les >0,1 A geschakeld heeft, is de lo strato dorato si deteriora. > 0,1 A, se quema la capa dorada
Goldschicht an den Kontakten on the contacts will have been contacts est détruite. Ensuite, il gouden laag op de contacten Successivamente può ancora en los contactos. Después sólo
weggebrannt. Danach kann er burnt through. It can then only be ne peut fonctionner qu’à cette weggebrand. Daarna kan de essere azionato solo con potenza podrá funcionar con esta tensión
nur noch mit dieser oder höherer NO operated at this power rating or puissance ou à une puissance DG..G alleen nog maar voor pari a questa o superiore. o una superior.
2 COM
Leistung betrieben werden. 3
higher power rating. supérieure. dat vermogen of voor hogere ➔ Il contatto 3 e 2 si chiude quando ➔ Los contactos 3 y 2 cierran con el
NC
➔ Die Kontakte 3 und 2 schließen 1 ➔ Contacts 3 and 2 close when sub- ➔ Les contacts 3 et 2 se ferment vermogens worden gebruikt. la pressione aumenta. Il contatto aumento de presión. Los contac-
bei steigendem Druck. Die Kon- ject to increasing pressure. Con- en cas de montée de la pression. ➔ De contacten 3 en 2 gaan bij stij- 1 e 3 si chiude quando la pressio- tos 1 y 3 cierran con el descenso
takte 1 und 3 schließen bei fallen- tacts 1 and 3 close when subject Les contacts 1 et 3 se ferment en gende druk open. De contacten 1 ne diminuisce. de presión.
dem Druck. to falling pressure. cas de chute de la pression. en 3 gaan bij dalende druk dicht. ▼ ▼
▼ ▼ ▼ ▼

-5-
1 Anlage spannungsfrei schalten. 1 Disconnect the system from the 1 Mettre l’installation hors tension. 1 Installatie spanningsvrij maken. 1 Togliere la tensione dall’impianto. 1 Desconectar la instalación de la
electrical power supply. alimentación eléctrica.

DG..B, DG..H, 2 3 4 5 L1(+) 6

DG..U DG..N 3 1
2 NC 3
COM COM
NO
2 1
NO NC

Pg 11: Ø 8–12 mm

DG..T: 220/240 V~, L1(+) 6 24 V= LED + = schwarz – = weiß L1(+) 6

black white
DG..N: 110/120 V~, 3 1 3 noir blanc 3 1
2 NC 3
DG..K: 24 V=, LED COM COM zwart wit COM 2 NC COM
NO NO
2 1 nero bianco 2 1
NO NC negro blanco NO NC
+
-
N N
N(-) N(-)

7 8 9

DG..6 2 3 4 5 L1(+) 6
3 L1(+) 3 1
COM
2 1
NO NC
L1(+)
Pg 11: Ø 8–12 mm
2

DG..T: 220/240 V~, L1(+) 6 N (-) 24 V= LED + = schwarz – = weiß 7 8 9

black white
DG..N: 110/120 V~, 3
COM
L1(+)
noir blanc
3 1 zwart wit
DG..K: 24 V=, LED
nero bianco
+ negro blanco
2 NO
- 1

N(-) 2

Funktiontest Function check Essai de Functietest Verifica di Ensayo de

➔ Zu empfehlen ist eine Funktions- ➔ We recommend a function check fonctionnement ➔ Raadzaam is een controle op funzionamento funcionamiento
prüfung einmal im Jahr. once a year. ➔ Un essai de fonctionnement goede werking één keer per jaar. ➔ Si consiglia l’esecuzione di un ➔ Se recomienda un ensayo del
annuel est recommandé. controllo del funzionamento una funcionamiento una vez al año.
volta l’anno.

-6-
Zubehör Accessories Accessoires Toebehoren Accessori Accesorios
Befestigungsset Fastening set Jeu de fixation Montageset Set di fissaggio Set de fijación
1 2

74915387

Verbindungsset Connecting set Jeu de connexion Verbindingsset Set di collegamento Set de unión
➔ Zur Überwachung eines mini- ➔ For monitoring the minimum/ ➔ Pour la surveillance d’une pression ➔ Voor het bewaken van een ➔ Per il controllo di una pressione ➔ Para el control de la presión de
malen/maximalen Eingangsdru- maximum inlet pressure pe. d’entrée pe mini/maxi. minimale/maximale ingangsdruk di ingresso pe di minima / di entrada mínima / máxima pe.
ckes pe. pe. massima.
DG..U, 1 2 3 4
DG..H, 2
DG..N, 1
2x 1x

74912250

Außenverstellung External adjustment Ajustement extérieur Buitenverstelling Regolatore esterno Ajuste exterior

1 2

74916155

Prüftaste PIA PIA test key Clé d’essai PIA Testtoets PIA Tasto di prova PIA Pulsador de control PIA

1
Click

TEST

Rp 1/4

74329466

▼ ▼ ▼ ▼ ▼ ▼

-7-
Schlauchset Tube set Jeu de flexibles Slangenset Set di tubi flessibili Set de tubos flexibles
➔ Nur für Luft ➔ for air only ➔ uniquement pour air ➔ alleen lucht ➔ solo per aria ➔ sólo para aire
1

74912952

Normgerätestecker Standard coupler plug Socle connecteur standard Standaardstekker Spina per apparecchi a norma Conector normalizado

1 2
1 3
2 NC COM
NO L1(+)

3
COM
2 1
NO NC

74915388

Signallampe Pilot lamp Lampe témoi Controlelampje Spia di controllo Lámpara de señal

1 2
220/240 V~:
74916122
110/120 V~:
74916121
48 V~/=:
74916123
24 V=, LED:
74916120

Technische Änderungen, die dem We reserve the right to make Sous réserve de modifications Technische wijzigingen ter verbetering Salvo modifiche tecniche per Se reserva el derecho a realizar modi-
Fortschritt dienen, vorbehalten. technical modifications in the techniques visant à améliorer nos van onze producten voorbehouden. migliorie. ficaciones técnicas sin previo aviso.
interests of progress. produits.

-8-
 Series 72
Modutrol IV™ Motors

PRODUCT DATA

FEATURES
• Replaces M744S,T,Y and M745S,T,Y Motors.
• M7261, M7274, M7281, M7284, and M7294 are
non-spring return motors; M7272, M7282, M7285,
and M7286 are spring return motors.
• Oil immersed motor and gear train for reliable
performance and long life.
• Wiring box provides NEMA 3 weather protection.
• Actuator motor and circuitry operate from 24 Vac.
Models available with factory installed transformer
or an internal transformer can be field added.
• Quick connect terminals standard—screw terminal
adapter available.
• Adapter bracket for matching shaft height of older
motors is standard with replacement motors.
• Nominal timing of 30 seconds for 90° stroke and
APPLICATION 60 seconds for 160° stroke.
• Valve and damper linkages, explosion-proof housing,
The Series 72 Modutrol IV Motors are used to control and auxiliary switches available as accessories.
dampers and valves. The motors accept a current or voltage • Spring return motors are rated for 25 lb.-in. and
signal from an electronic controller to position a damper or 60 lb.-in torque.
valve at any point between open and closed.
• Non-spring return motors are rated for 35 lb.-in.,
75 lb.-in., 150 lb.-in., and 300 lb.-in. torque.
• Models available with adjustable start (zero) and span.
• Models available with 4 to 20 mA input signal.
• Models available with 2 to 10 Vdc input signal.
• Die-cast aluminum housing.

Contents
Application ........................................................................ 1
Features ........................................................................... 1
Specifications ................................................................... 2
Ordering Information ........................................................ 2
Installation ........................................................................ 5
Settings and Adjustments ................................................. 10
Operation and Checkout .................................................. 12

® U.S. Registered Trademark

Copyright © 2000 Honeywell • All Rights Reserved ® 63- 2202- 4
SERIES 72 MODUTROL IV™ MOTORS

SPECIFICATIONS IMPORTANT
The specifications given in this publication do not
include normal manufacturing tolerances. Therefore,
Models: TRADELINE models are selected and packaged to an individual unit may not exactly match the listed
provide ease of stocking, ease of handling and maximum specifications. Also, this product is tested and
replacement value. TRADELINE model specifications are the calibrated under closely controlled conditions and
same as those of standard models unless specified otherwise. some minor differences in performance can be
TRADELINE models have auxiliary switch cams. expected if those conditions are changed.

NOTE: Auxiliary switches can only be added to motors that Modutrol IV Order Number Guide: See Table 1.
include auxiliary switch cams. (These cams cannot
be field-added.) Dimensions: See Fig. 1.

Table 1. Modutrol IV Order Number Guide.

M Motor
72 4-20 mA or 2-10 Vdc Controla
6 — 35 lb-in. Non-Spring Return
7 25 lb-in. Spring Return 75 lb-in. Non-Spring Return
8 60 lb-in. Spring Return 150 lb-in. Non-Spring Return
9 — 300 lb-in. Non-Spring Return
1 Single-ended shaft Non-Spring Return
2 Normally Closedb Spring Return
4 Dual-ended shaft Non-Spring Return
5 Normally Closedb Spring Return
6 Normally Openc Spring Return
A 0 Auxiliary Switches Fixed Stroke Normally Closedb
B 1 Auxiliary Switch
C 2 Auxiliary Switches
D 0 Auxiliary Switch Adjustable Stroke
F 2 Auxiliary Switches
G 0 Auxiliary Switch Fixed Stroke Normally Openc
L 1 Auxiliary Switch Adjustable Stroke
Q 2 Auxiliary Switches Fixed Stroke Normally Closedb

M 61 8 4 A XXXX See Catalog for Complete O.S. Number

a
Adjustable zero and span.
b
Electrically normally closed. Shaft rotates clockwise (viewed from the power end) with increase in control signal. Motor drives to
normally closed position when powered with control wiring not connected.
c
Electrically normally open. Shaft rotates counterclockwise (viewed from the power end) with increase in control signal. Motor
drives to normally open position when powered with control wiring not connected.

ORDERING INFORMATION
When purchasing replacement and modernization products from your TRADELINE® wholesaler or distributor, refer to the
TRADELINE® Catalog or price sheets for complete ordering number.

If you have additional questions, need further information, or would like to comment on our products or services, please write or
phone:
1. Your local Home and Building Control Sales Office (check white pages of your phone directory).
2. Home and Building Control Customer Relations
Honeywell, 1885 Douglas Drive North
Minneapolis, Minnesota 55422-4386
In Canada—Honeywell Limited/Honeywell Limitée, 35 Dynamic Drive, Scarborough, Ontario M1V 4Z9.
International Sales and Service Offices in all principal cities of the world. Manufacturing in Australia, Canada, Finland, France,
Germany, Japan, Mexico, Netherlands, Spain, Taiwan, United Kingdom, U.S.A.

63-2202—4 2
 SERIES 72 MODUTROL IV™ MOTORS

TOP VIEW TOP VIEW OF BRACKET

4-7/8 4-1/4
(124) (107)

4-5/8
(116) 5-13/16
(148)
5-1/2
(140) 2-5/16
(58)

11/16
(17)

POWER END
1/4 13/16
(7) 3 (20)
1/4 (7)
4-1/16 (103) 1-1/2 (37)
4 4-7/8 (124)
4-1/16 (103) 5-9/16 (141)
5
4-1/16 (103)

1-1/2 (37)

WIRING
BOX

3/4
(19)

MOTOR
1 6-7/16
(164)
SPRING RETURN MODEL SHOWN
AUXILARY POWER 5-3/8
END END (137) 1 SOME MODELS DO NOT HAVE AN AUXILIARY
SHAFT. ALL OTHER DIMENSIONS ARE THE SAME.
2-9/16
(66) 2 FOR HIGH TORQUE (60 LB-IN.) SPRING RETURN
MODELS 8-3/4 (222); FOR LOW TORQUE (25 LB-IN.)
SPRING RETURN MODELS 8-1/4 (210);
NON-SPRING RETURN MODELS 7-5/16 (185).
9/16 (15) FOR HIGH TORQUE (60 LB-IN.) SPRING
3
2 RETURN MODELS (SHOWN).

4 FOR LOW TORQUE (25 LB-IN.) SPRING

3/4 RETURN MODELS.
ADAPTER
BRACKET (19)
5 FOR NON-SPRING RETURN MODELS. M17089BB

Fig. 1. Series 72 Modutrol IV Motor dimensions in in. (mm).

Controller: These motors can be used with any electronic Table 2. Series 72 Modutrol IV Motor Power
controller that provides a stable noise-free proportional Consumption Ratings (at 120 Vac, 50/60 Hz).
current output as specified in Electrical Ratings, Input
Range below. Power Consumption
Model Watts Amps
Electrical Ratings: M7261 19 0.20
Power Consumption: See Table 2.
Input Range: M7272 26 0.26
Current, Nonadjustable: 4 to 20 mA nominal, 25 mA M7274 15 0.71
maximum.
Current, Adjustable: 4 to 20 mA adjustable, 50 mA M7281 23 0.24
maximum. M7282 28 0.28
Zero/Null (Motor Closed): 0.08 to 18 mA. M7284 23 0.24
Span: 1.8 to 18 mA.
Voltage, Nonadjustable: 2 to 10 Vdc. M7285 28 0.28
Input Impedance: M7286 23 1.00
4 to 20 mA Input: 100 ohms.
2 to 10 Vdc Input: 400K ohms. M7294 23 0.24

3 63-2202— 4
SERIES 72 MODUTROL IV™ MOTORS

Auxiliary Switch Ratings (in Amps): See Table 3. Accessories:

198162AA Internal Transformer 120/208/240 Vac 50/60 Hz
Table 3. Auxiliary Switch Ratings (in Amps). primary, 24 Vac secondary.
198162EA Internal Transformer; 120 Vac 50/60 Hz primary,
One Contact 24 Vac secondary.
Ratinga 120V 240V 198162GA Internal Transformer; 220 Vac 50/60 Hz primary,
Full Load 7.2 3.6 24 Vac secondary.
198162JA Internal Transformer; 24 Vac 50/60 Hz primary,
Locked Rotor 43.2 21.6 24 Vac secondary (for electrical isolation).
a
40 VA pilot duty, 120/240 Vac on opposite contact. 220736A Internal Auxiliary Switch Kit; one switch, can be
field-installed on TRADELINE models.
Stroke: Fixed 90° or 160° models available. Other models 220736B Internal Auxiliary Switch Kit; two switches, can be
available with field adjustable strokes from 90° to 160°. field-installed on TRADELINE models.
Stroke adjusted by means of cams located in the wiring 220738A Adapter Bracket raises motor shaft height by 19 mm
compartment. to match that of previous Modutrol® Motor models.
220741A Screw Terminal Adapter converts the standard
Timing: Nominal 30 seconds for 90° stroke and 60 seconds quick-connect terminals to screw terminals.
for 160° stroke. 221455A Infinitely Adjustable Crank Arm, can rotate through
downward position and clear motor base without requiring
Dead Weight Load On Shaft: 200 lb (91 kg) on motor power an adapter bracket.
or auxiliary end; maximum combined load of 300 lb (136 kg). 4074ERU Weatherproofing Kit provides NEMA 3 rating for
Modutrol IV Motors mounted in position other than upright.
Motor Rotation: 4074EZE Bag Assembly with parts that can provide CE
Closed: Counterclockwise rotation limit as viewed from motor compliance.
power end. 7617ADW Crank Arm, can rotate through downward position
Open: Clockwise rotation limit as viewed from motor power and clear motor base without requiring an adapter bracket.
end. ES650-117 Explosion-Proof Housing encloses motor for use
Mechanically Normally Closed: Spring return. Normally closed in explosive atmospheres. Not for use with Q5001 (or any
motors rotate to closed position on power loss. other valve linkages). Order separately from O-Z/Gedney
Mechanically Normally Open: Spring return. Normally open Inc. To order, contact: O-Z/Gedney, Nelson Enclosures and
motors rotate to open position on power loss. Controls,
Electrically Normally Closed: Both spring return and non- (918) 641-7381 or (918) 641-7374; or write to:
spring motors return to closed position on minimum signal. O-Z/Gedney, Nelson Enclosures and Controls
Electrically Normally Open: Both spring return and non-spring P.O. Box 471650
return motors return to open position on minimum signal. Tulsa, OK 74147-1650
(Requires Honeywell 7617DM Coupling.)
Ambient Temperature Ratings: -40 to 150°F (-40 to 66°C). Q100 Linkage connects Modutrol® Motor to V51 Butterfly
Valve. Requires the 220738A Adapter Bracket.
Shaft: 3/8 in. [9.5 mm] square. Q181 Auxiliary Potentiometer for sequence or unison control
of 1 to 4 additional modulating (Series 90) motors.
Approvals: Q5001 Bracket and Linkage Assembly connects Modutrol IV
Underwriters Laboratories Inc. Listed: File No. E4436; Guide Motor to water or steam valve.
No. XAPX. Q605 Damper Linkage connects motor to damper. Includes
Canadian Standards Association Certified: General listed File motor crank arm.
No. LR1620; Guide No. 400-E. Q607 External Auxiliary Switch controls auxiliary equipment
as a function of motor position.

63-2202— 4 4
 SERIES 72 MODUTROL IV™ MOTORS

INSTALLATION
When Installing this Product... Mounting
1. Read these instructions carefully. Failure to follow them Use the following guidelines for proper motor mounting:
could damage the product or cause a hazardous • Always install motors with the crankshaft horizontal.
condition. • Mounting flanges extending from motor housing base are
2. Check the ratings given in the instructions and on the drilled for 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) machine screws or bolts.
product to make sure the product is suitable for your • Non-Spring Return Motors are shipped from the factory in
application. the closed position (at the counterclockwise rotation limit,
3. Installer must be a trained, experienced service as viewed from the motor power end).
technician. • Spring Return Motors are shipped from the factory in their
4. After installation is complete, check out product normal position.
operation as provided in these instructions. • Normally closed models are shipped at the counterclockwise
rotation limit, as viewed from the motor power end.
CAUTION • Normally open models are shipped at the clockwise
rotation limit, as viewed from the motor power end.
Electrical Shock or Equipment Damage Hazard.
Can shock individuals or short equipment
circuitry. M7272, M7282, M7285, M7286
Disconnect all power supplies before installation. VERTICAL
VERTICAL
Motors with auxiliary switches can have more than REFERENCE
REFERENCE

one disconnect. 10
FULLY CLOSED
FULLY CLOSED
10

CAUTION 90
Equipment Damage Hazard.
160
Can damage the motor beyond repair.
Never turn the motor shaft by hand or with a wrench.
Forcibly turning the motor shaft damages the gear FULLY OPEN
train and stroke limit contacts.

IMPORTANT FULLY OPEN

90 DEGREE STROKE
Always conduct a thorough checkout when 160 DEGREE STROKE
installation is complete. SPRING RETURN MOTORS

Location M7261, M7274, M7281, M7284, M7294

Allow enough clearance for accessory installation and motor
VERTICAL
servicing when selecting a location (see Fig. 1). If located VERTICAL REFERENCE
outdoors, use liquid-tight conduit connectors with the junction REFERENCE
FULLY CLOSED
box to provide NEMA 3 weather protection. If mounted 10
outdoors in a position other than upright, install a 4074ERU 45
FULLY
Weatherproofing Kit and liquid-tight connectors to provide CLOSED
NEMA 3 protection.
160

90

CAUTION FULLY
OPEN
Motor Damage Hazard.
Deteriorating vapors and acid fumes can damage
FULLY OPEN
metal parts.
90 DEGREE STROKE 160 DEGREE STROKE
Install motor in areas free of acid fumes and other
deteriorating vapors. NON-SPRING RETURN MOTORS M5509

In excessive salt environments, mounting base and screws Fig. 2. Motor shaft position at limit of rotation
should be zinc or cadmium plated, not stainless steel or brass. (viewed from motor power end).
Use the 220738A Adapter Bracket for mounting on these
surfaces.

5 63-2202— 4
SERIES 72 MODUTROL IV™ MOTORS

Adapter Bracket Damper Linkages

The 220738A Adapter Bracket, positioned between the motor The motor does not include a crank arm. Order the crank arm
and the equipment, raises motor shaft height by 0.75 in. separately (see Accessories in the Specifications section). For
(19 mm) to match that of previous Modutrol® Motor models. detailed instructions on the assembly of specific linkages,
refer to the Installation Instructions packed with the linkage.
The following applications require this bracket:
• Q607 External Auxiliary Switch.
• Damper linkage applications requiring added clearance to CAUTION
allow: Equipment Damage Hazard.
— Crank arm rotation through the downward position. Stalling a motor can damage the drive shaft.
— Sufficient damper linkage to reach the motor shaft. Ensure installation of motors and linkages allows the
• All valve linkages except the Q5001. motor to drive through full stroke without obstruction.

NOTE: When the bracket is not used in a replacement

application, the damper linkage requires adjustment Valve Linkages
for the new shaft position. The Q100 Linkage requires a 220738A Adapter Bracket for all
valve applications. Applications with the Q5001 Valve Linkage
To mount the motor with the bracket: do not require the 220738A Adapter Bracket (see Fig. 4).
1. Mount the bracket to the equipment with existing or
standard bolts. For detailed instructions on specific linkage assemblies, refer
2. Using the provided bolts, mount the motor to the bracket to the instruction sheet packed with the linkage. In general,
threaded holes. See Fig. 3. check the following points when installing a motor and linkage:
For valve linkage applications (other than the Q5001): • Adjust valve and louver-type damper linkages so the
1. Mount the bracket to the linkage. damper or valve moves through only the maximum required
2. Position the motor on the bracket to align the motor distance while the motor moves through its full stroke.
shaft with the linkage. • With modulating control, maximum damper opening should
3. Attach the motor to the bracket with the four bolts be no more than 60 degrees. Little additional airflow is
provided. See Fig. 4. provided beyond this point.
• Do not exceed load and torque ratings in any application.

Junction Box
When used with liquid-tight conduit connectors, the junction
box provides NEMA 3 weather protection for the motor. The
junction box, standard with replacement motors, encloses the
terminals and provides knockouts for wiring conduits. Housing
an internal transformer or internal auxiliary switches requires
using a junction box.

63-2202— 4 6
 SERIES 72 MODUTROL IV™ MOTORS

STANDARD
BOLTS (4)
BOLTS
1 PROVIDED (4)

WIRING
BOX

MOTOR

ND
RE
WE
PO

ADAPTER
BRACKET

EQUIPMENT ND ND
BASE RE
WE
RE
WE
PO PO

1 No. 12 OR 1/4 in. ZINC PLATED

MACHINE SCREWS OR BOLTS

M452E NON-SPRING RETURN SPRING RETURN

Fig. 3. Mounting the motor with an adapter bracket.

WIRING
BOX

POWER
END OF MOTOR
MOTOR

Q5001
VALVE
LINKAGE

1/4-20 UNC
1 in. LONG
MOUNTING
BOLTS
VALVE

M17092

Fig. 4. Mounting the motor on a Q5001 Valve Linkage.

7 63-2202— 4
SERIES 72 MODUTROL IV™ MOTORS

Wiring
3. Fig. 5 shows that motor terminals are quick-connects
CAUTION 4.
located on top of the printed circuit board.
To access the wiring compartment:
Electrical Shock or Equipment Damage Hazard. a. Remove the four screws from the junction box top.
Can shock individuals or short equipment circuitry. b. Lift off the cover.
Disconnect all power supplies before installation. 5. Fig. 6 shows the internal wiring schematic.
Motors with auxiliary switches can have more than 6. Refer to Fig. 7 and 8 for typical wiring.
one disconnect.
Wire the motor as follows:
IMPORTANT 1. Remove the wiring box cover by removing the four
All wiring must agree with applicable codes, screws holding the cover to the motor.
ordinances and regulations. 2. Wire motor to system using quick-connect terminals in
wiring box.
1. Ensure that the voltage and frequency stamped on the 3. Replace wiring box cover.
motor correspond with the power supply characteristics.
2. When connecting several motors in parallel, ensure that
the power supply VA rating is large enough to provide
power to all motors used without overloading.

A B
RIGHT/INNER RIGHT/INNER
AUXILIARY AUXILIARY
SWITCH (+) SWITCH

INNER AUXILIARY INNER AUXILIARY

F (TEST) SWITCH CAM (BLUE) F SWITCH CAM (BLUE)
V(-)

POWER POWER
Y(+) END END

OUTER AUXILIARY (-) OUTER AUXILIARY

SWITCH CAM (RED) SWITCH CAM (RED)
T2 T2

LEFT/OUTER LEFT/OUTER
T1 AUXILIARY T1 AUXILIARY
SWITCH SWITCH

NOTE: FEATURES AVAILABLE ON SOME MODELS ONLY. NOTE: FEATURES AVAILABLE ON SOME MODELS ONLY.

2 TO 10 VDC INPUT MOTORS 4 TO 20 mA NONADJUSTABLE INPUT MOTORS

C SPAN ADJUST
POTENTIOMETER
RIGHT/INNER
AUXILIARY
SWITCH
(+)
F INNER AUXILIARY
SPAN ADJUST
MAX

SWITCH CAM (BLUE)

MIN

POWER
END
START ADJUST

(–)
MAX

OUTER AUXILIARY
SWITCH CAM (RED)
T2
MIN

T1
LEFT/OUTER
AUXILIARY
SWITCH

START ADJUST POTENTIOMETER

NOTE: FEATURES AVAILABLE ON SOME MODELS ONLY. M5777

4 TO 20 mA ADJUSTABLE INPUT MOTORS

Fig. 5. Terminals and adjustments.

63-2202— 4 8
 SERIES 72 MODUTROL IV™ MOTORS

+ – F MOTOR 1

T2 L1
T1
(HOT)
CONTROLLER
T2 L2
BRAKE
CIRCUITRY 3 24V
1 - -
ELECTRONIC L1
CIRCUIT
4 (HOT) + +
TRIAC TRIAC L2
F 2
SWITCHING SWITCHING
T1
1 POWER SUPPLY. PROVIDE DISCONNECT MEANS AND
OVERLOAD PROTECTION AS REQURED.

2 CONNECTING F TO – WILL DRIVE MOTOR TO FULLY OPEN.

FEEDBACK M5778
POTENTIOMETER

Fig. 7. Typical system wiring.

CLOSE OPEN
LIMIT L1 L2
LIMIT (HOT)
-20 mA 1
ONTROLLER MOTOR

- - T1

+ + T2

CCW CW
F 2
WINDING WINDING
(CLOSE) (OPEN)
2 2
MOTOR

- T1
1 POWER SUPPLY. PROVIDE DISCONNECT MEANS AND
OVERLOAD PROTECTION AS REQUIRED. + T2

2 DIRECTION OF MOTOR TRAVEL AS VIEWED FROM POWER END. F 2

3 INTERNALLY MOUNTED TRANSFORMER. DO NOT CONNECT

POWER SUPPLY TO T1 AND T2. MOTOR
4 BRAKE CIRCUITRY ONLY ON SPRING RETURN MODELS. M5511
- T1

Fig. 6. Series 72 motor internal wiring schematic. + T2

F 2

1 POWER SUPPLY. PROVIDE DISCONNECT MEANS AND

OVERLOAD PROTECTION AS REQURED.

2 CONNECTING F TO – WILL DRIVE MOTOR TO FULLY OPEN.

M5774

Fig. 8. Driving up to six motors from

one 4 to 20 mA controller.

9 63-2202— 4
SERIES 72 MODUTROL IV™ MOTORS

SETTINGS AND ADJUSTMENTS

Zero and Span Adjustment for M7284Q and Auxiliary Switches
M7285Q Motors (Fig. 5.)
1. Adjust the start potentiometer fully clockwise (maximum
zero) and the span potentiometer fully counterclockwise CAUTION
(minimum span). Electrical Shock or Equipment Damage Hazard.
2. Set the controller current to the value required to drive Can shock individuals or short equipment
the motor to the closed position. circuitry.
3. Turn the start potentiometer slowly counterclockwise Disconnect all power supplies before installation.
until the motor begins to open. This is defined as the Motors with auxiliary switches can have more than
start or zero setting. one disconnect.
4. Set the controller current to the value required to drive
the motor to the fully open position. The motor will open.
5. Turn the span potentiometer clockwise until the motor
starts to close. The difference between the fully open CAUTION
span position current and the zero position current is Equipment Damage Hazard.
defined as the operating span. Can damage the motor beyond repair.
6. Recheck the start and readjust the span potentiometer Never turn the motor shaft by hand or with a wrench.
P1 if necessary. Turn the start potentiometer clockwise Forcibly turning the motor shaft damages the gear
to increase the zero position. train and stroke limit contacts.
7. Recheck the span and readjust the span potentiometer
if necessary. Turn it clockwise to increase the full span Adjustable cams actuate the auxiliary switches. These cams
position. can be set to actuate the switches at any angle within the
8. For sequential operation, as shown in Fig. 9, repeat the motor stroke. Select switch differential of 1° or 10°.
above steps for each motor.
Motors with factory added auxiliary switches are shipped in
the closed position (fully counterclockwise, as viewed from the
SEQUENTIAL OPERATION
FOR ADJUSTABLE ZERO AND SPAN MODELS
motor power end) with auxiliary cams set to actuate switches
20 30° from the closed position and to provide 1° degree
(10) differential. With the motor in the closed (fully
counterclockwise) position, the auxiliary switch breaks
16 contacts R-B. See Fig. 10 for auxiliary switch wiring.
mA CURRENT (OR VOLTS DC)

(8)

TRADELINE Motors are shipped with auxiliary switch cams

CONTROL OUTPUT

12 that permit acceptance of 220736A,B Internal Auxiliary Switch

(6)
Kits. Refer to form 63-2228 for 220736A,B Installation
Instructions.
8
(4)

4
(2)

0
CLOSED OPEN CLOSED OPEN CLOSED OPEN
MOTOR 1 MOTOR 2 MOTOR 3

1 3 3 3 2

1 MOTOR 1 PROPORTIONS BETWEEN 4 AND 12 mA; FULLY

CLOSED AT 4 mA, FULLY OPENED AT 12 mA.

MOTOR 2 PROPORTIONS BETWEEN 8 AND 16 mA; FULLY

CLOSED AT 8 mA, FULLY OPENED AT 16 mA.

MOTOR 3 PROPORTIONS BETWEEN 12 AND 20 mA SIGNAL;

FULLY CLOSED AT 12 mA, FULLY OPENED AT 20 mA.

2 UP TO 6 MOTORS CAN BE DRIVEN SEQUENTIALY OR IN

UNISON FROM ONE CONTROLLER.

3 ADJUST ZERO ADJUST AND SPAN ADJUST POTENTIOMETERS

TO ACHIEVE DESIRED SEQUENCE. M2893A

Fig. 9. Sequential operation of motors.

63-2202— 4 10
 SERIES 72 MODUTROL IV™ MOTORS

Auxiliary Switch Adjustment

IMPORTANT 6. For a switch differential of 10° rotate the cam
When adjusting the auxiliary switch cams use the approximately 180° so the slow-rise portion of the
following procedure: cam actuates the switch.
1.Insert 1/8 in. screwdriver blade into a slot on cam 7. Check continuity of the auxiliary switch contacts R-B.
and move the screwdriver top as far as possible in 8. Rotate the cam as follows:
the required direction. See Fig. 10. a. If the contacts are open, rotate the cam
2.Repeat step 1 in successive cam slots until the counterclockwise until the R-B contacts close.
cam is in the required position. b. If the contacts are closed, rotate the cam clockwise
until the R-B contacts open.
Use the following procedure to obtain the desired auxiliary c. Make final adjustment in the proper direction to
switch settings: obtain contact make or break at the desired position.
1. Remove the top cover from the motor to gain access 9. Check for the proper differential and switching of the
to the motor terminals and auxiliary cams. auxiliary equipment by driving the motor though the full
2. Disconnect the controller from the motor. stroke in both directions.
3. Connect a current source to the positive and negative 10. Disconnect power, remove current source, reconnect
terminals. the controller, and replace the top cover on the motor.
4. Drive the motor to the position where the auxiliary
equipment is to be switched by increasing or decreasing NOTE: Changing the differential from 1° to 10° reverses the
the current. switching action. For example, with a 10° differential,
5. For a switch differential of 1°, check continuity of auxiliary switch contacts R-B make and R-W break on a
switch contacts R-B and rotate the cam as follows: counterclockwise (closed) rotation. With a 1°
a. If the contacts are open, rotate the cam clockwise differential, switch contacts R-W make and R-B
until the R-B contacts close. break on a counterclockwise (closed) rotation.
b. If the contacts are closed, rotate the cam
counterclockwise until the R-B contacts open.

MOVE SCREWDRIVER AT NOTE: CAMS ARE OFFSET

TOP ONLY TO ADJUST CAM. VERTICALLY TO PROVIDE
BETTER VIEW OF BACK CAM.
1/8 INCH
STRAIGHT-BLADE
SCREWDRIVER

RIGHT/INNER
SLOW RISE AUXILIARY
PORTION SWITCH
(APPROX.
10° DIFF.)
INNER
AUXILIARY
CAM
(BLUE)

FAST RISE
PORTION
(APPROX.
1° DIFF.)

LEFT/OUTER
AUXILIARY
SWITCH
SLOW RISE
PORTION
(APPROX.
FAST RISE OUTER 10° DIFF.)
PORTION AUXILIARY RIGHT/INNER
(APPROX. CAM AUXILIARY SWITCH
1° DIFF.) (RED)
INNER AUXILIARY
CAM (BLUE)

MOTOR MOTOR LEFT/OUTER OUTER AUXILIARY

OPEN CLOSE AUXILIARY CAM (RED)
POWER SWITCH POWER END
END OF MOTOR M17101

Fig. 10. Auxiliary switch adjustment.

11 63-2202— 4
SERIES 72 MODUTROL IV™ MOTORS

OPERATION AND CHECKOUT

Operation Inspect the motor, linkage, and valve or damper to see that all
mechanical connections are correct and secure.
The motor feedback potentiometer and control current input
circuit form a bridge circuit. As long as the final control In damper installations, the pushrod should not extend more
element remains at the position proportional to the input than a few inches past the ball joints. Check to see that
current from the controller, the circuit is balanced, and the there is adequate clearance for the linkage to move through
motor does not run. When the value of the controlled medium its stroke without binding or striking other objects.
changes, the current from the controller changes, and
unbalance is amplified to energize the Triac switching to run See controller or system instructions for additional checkout
the motor in the proper direction to correct the change in the procedures.
temperature or the pressure. The motor turns the feedback
potentiometer to rebalance the circuit and stop the motor.
Motor Operation Checkout
Check motor operation as follows:
Checkout 1. To close the motor, open terminals +, -, and F.
After installation and linkage adjustment, operate the motor 2. To open the motor, connect terminal F to the
through the controller. Make sure that: negative (-) motor terminal.
• The motor properly operates the damper or valve.
• The motor responds properly as the input is varied.
• The auxiliary switch, if used, operates at the desired point
of motor rotation.

Printed in U.S.A. on recycled

63-2202— 4 B.B. Rev. 11-00 paper containing at least 10%
post-consumer paper fibers.
 EC7830A, RM7830A, EC7850A, RM7850A
7800 SERIES Relay Modules
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
Environmental Ratings:
APPLICATION Ambient Temperature:
Operating: -40°F to 140°F (-40°C to +60°C).
The Honeywell EC/RM7830A and EC/RM7850A are Storage: -40°F to 150°F (-40°C to +66°C).
microprocessor-based integrated burner controls for Humidity: 85% relative humidity continuous,
automatically fired gas, oil, or combination fuel single burner noncondensing.
full modulation (EC/RM7850A) or on/off (EC/RM7830A) Vibration: 0.5G environment.
applications. The EC/RM7830A; EC/RM7850A system
consists of a relay module, subbase, amplifier, and purge Approvals:
card. Options include keyboard display module (KDM), RM7830A and RM7850A:
Personal Computer Interface, Data ControlBus Module™, Underwriters Laboratories Inc. Listed: File No. MP268,
remote display mounting and Combustion System Manager® Guide No. MCCZ.
Software. Canadian Standards Association Certified: LR9S329-3.
Factory Mutual Approved: Report No. J.I.1V9A0.AF.
Functions provided by the EC/RM7830A and EC/RM7850A Industrial Risk Insurers: Acceptable.
include automatic burner sequencing, flame supervision, Federal Communications Commission: Part 15,
system status indication, system or self-diagnostics and Class B, Emissions.
troubleshooting. Text readout on the Keyboard Display Module EC7830A and EC7850A: Factory Mutual Approved.
is available in English, Spanish, Portuguese, Katakana
(Japanese), French, Chinese, German, and Italian languages. These products also comply with the following European
directives:
This document provides installation and static checkout Gas Appliance Directive: 90/396/EEC.
instructions. Other applicable publications are: Low Voltage Directive: 73/23/EEC.
63-2278: Q7700 Network Interface Unit Product Data. EMC Directive: 89/336/EEC.
65-0084: Q7800A,B 22-Terminal Wiring Subbase GASTEC: CE-63AP3070/1.
Product Data. Lloyds Register Approval.
65-0090: S7800A Keyboard Display Module Product Data.
65-0091: S7810A Data ControlBus Module™ Product Oil appliances:
Data. EC7830A: DIN-5F 106/96.
65-0228: S7810B Multi-Drop Switch Module Product Data. EC7850A: DIN-5F 107/96.
65-0095: S7820 Remote Reset Module Product Data.
65-0097: 221729C Dust Cover Packing Instructions. These products are approved according to EN298, “Automatic
65-0102: ZM7850A Combustion System Manager® gas burner systems for gas burners and gas burning
Operating Instructions. appliances with or without fans.”
65-0109: R7824, R7847, R7848, R7849, R7861, R7886
Flame Amplifiers for the 7800 SERIES Please note the following to comply with EN60730 for remote
Product Data. mounting of the KDM and/or remote reset module. It is
65-0131: 221818A Extension Cable Assembly Product necessary to provide electrical separation using insulation at
Data. least equivalent to double or reinforced insulation. This can be
65-0229: 7800 SERIES Relay Modules Checkout and accomplished by either:
Troubleshooting Product Data. 1. Optically isolating the communication and/or remote
reset lines from the control cabinet or
2. Providing physical separation from the communication
SPECIFICATIONS and/or remote reset lines using electrical conduit and a
204718a Remote Display Cover Assembly or other
suitable enclosure that meets ip40 class of protection.
Electrical Ratings (See Tables 3A, 3B, 3C and 3D):
Voltage and Frequency:
RM7830A and RM7850A:
120 Vac (+10/-15%), 50/60 Hz (±10%).
EC7830A and EC7850A:
220/240 Vac (+10%/-15%), 50/60 Hz (±10%)
Power Dissipation: 10W maximum.
Maximum Total Connected Load: 2000 VA.
Fusing Total Connected Load: 20A maximum, type FRN or
equivalent.
® U.S. Registered Trademark
Copyright © 1998 Honeywell Inc. • All Rights Reserved 66-1092-2
EC7830, RM7830A,EC7850A,RM7850A 7800 SERIES RELAY MODULES

9. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate

INSTALLATION radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used
in accordance with the instructions, can cause
When Installing this Product… interference with radio communications. It has been
tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class
1. Read these instructions carefully. Failure to follow them B computing device of Part 15 of FCC rules, which
could damage the product or cause a hazardous are designed to provide reasonable protection
condition. against such interference when operated in a
2. Check the ratings given in the instructions and marked commercial environment. Operation of this
on the product to make sure the product is suitable for equipment in a residential area can cause
the application. interference, in which case, the users, at their own
3. Installer must be a trained, experienced, flame expense, may be required to take whatever
safeguard service technician. measures are required to correct this interference.
4. After installation is complete, check out the product 10. This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class B
operation as provided in these instructions. limits for radio noise for digital apparatus set out in
the Radio Interference Regulations of the Canadian
Department of Communications.
WARNING
Fire or Explosion Hazard. Location
Can cause property damage,
severe injury, or death.
Carefully follow safety requirements when installing a
Humidity
burner control.
Install the relay module where the relative humidity never
reaches the saturation point. The relay module is designed to
CAUTION operate in a maximum 85% relative humidity continuous,
noncondensing, moisture environment. Condensing moisture
Electrical Shock Hazard or Equipment/
Control Damage. can cause a safety shutdown.
Can cause electrical shock or equipment damage.
Disconnect power supply before beginning Vibration
installation.
Do not install the relay module where it can be subjected to
IMPORTANT vibration in excess of 0.5G continuous maximum vibration.
1. Wiring connections for the relay modules are unique;
refer to Fig. 3 and 4 or the appropriate Specifications Weather
for individual subbase wiring.
2. Wiring must comply with all applicable codes, The relay module is not designed to be weather tight. When
ordinances and regulations. installed outdoors, protect the relay module in an approved
3. Wiring must comply with NEC Class 1 weather-tight enclosure.
(Line Voltage) wiring.
4. Loads connected to the EC/RM7830A and
EC/RM7850A must not exceed those listed on the Mounting Wiring Subbase
relay module label or the Specifications; see Table 1.
5. Limits and interlocks must be rated to 1. Mount the subbase in any position except horizontally
simultaneously carry and break current to the with the bifurcated contacts pointing down. The
ignition transformer, pilot valve, and main fuel standard vertical position is recommended. Any other
valve(s). position decreases the maximum ambient temperature
6. All external timers must be listed or component- rating.
recognized by authorities who have proper 2. Select a location on a wall, burner or electrical panel.
jurisdiction. The Q7800 can be mounted directly in the control
7. For on-off gas-fired systems, some authorities who cabinet. Be sure to allow adequate clearance for
have jurisdiction prohibit the wiring of any limit or service, installation, access or removal of the relay
operating contacts in series between the flame module, expanded annunciator, KDM, flame amplifier,
safeguard control and the main fuel valve(s). flame amplifier signal voltage probes, run/test switch,
8. Two flame detectors can be connected in parallel electrical signal voltage probes and electrical field
with the exception of C7015 Infrared Flame connections.
Detectors. 3. For surface mounting, use the back of the subbase as a
template to mark the four screw locations, then drill the
pilot holes.
4. Securely mount the subbase using four no. 6 screws
(not provided).

66-1092—2 2
 EC7830, RM7830A,EC7850A,RM7850A 7800 SERIES RELAY MODULES

Wiring Subbase 2. For remote wiring of the KDM, refer to the

Specifications for the KDM (65-0090), Network
Interface Unit (63-2278), Data ControlBus Module™
CAUTION (65-0091) or Extension Cable Assembly (65-0131).
3. Disconnect the power supply from the main disconnect
Electrical Shock Hazard or Equipment Damage. before beginning installation to prevent electrical shock
Can cause electrical shock or damage equipment. and equipment damage. More than one disconnect can
Disconnect the power supply before beginning be required.
installation. 4. All wiring must comply with all applicable electrical
codes, ordinances and regulations. Wiring, where
The internal block diagram of the EC/RM7830A is shown in required, must comply with NEC Class 1 (Line Voltage)
Fig. 1 and the internal block diagram of the EC/RM7850A is wiring.
shown in Fig. 2. 5. For recommended wire size and type, see Table 1.
1. For subbase wiring and sequence charts, refer to Fig. 3 6. For recommended grounding practices, see Table 2.
and 4.
L1
HOT N
1
5 2
CONFIGURATION PLUG-IN PURGE
JUMPERS TIMER CARD
TEST
FLAME SIGNAL JACK
RUN/TEST
SWITCH F
MICROCOMPUTER PLUG-IN
FLAME G
RESET AMPLIFIER
PUSHBUTTON SHUTTER
2K 22

RELAY 3K
DRIVE 4K
CIRCUIT RELAY
5K STATUS
6K FEEDBACK
7K AND LINE
VOLTAGE
INPUTS
SAFETY RELAY
STATUS CIRCUIT 1K
LEDS

POWER SUPPLY CONTROL

ES2 POWER
17
3K2 AL
16
LOS RT
20 6 2K2 5K1
IGN
2 10
LD2 4K1
1K1 PV1
7 8
7K1
PV2
21
2K1 MV
9
6K1
FAN
4
3K1
AL
3
RELAY CONTACT OPEN
OPTIONAL KEYBOARD
DISPLAY MODULE F G ... 22 USER TERMINALS
RELAY CONTACT CLOSED
DDL RS485
RELAY COIL INDICATES FEEDBACK SENSING
1 5 OF RELAY CONTACT STATUS
DDL
COMMUNICATIONS 2 REMOTE FIELD WIRING AND LINE VOLTAGE INPUTS
3 RESET
INTERNAL WIRING

1 120 VAC, 50/60 Hz POWER SUPPLY, RM7830A; 220-240 VAC, 50/60 Hz POWER SUPPLY, EC7830A.
PROVIDE DISCONNECT MEANS AND OVERLOAD PROTECTION AS REQUIRED.

2 TO CONNECT L1 DIRECTLY TO LOS, AT LEAST ONE CONTROLLED SHUTDOWN MUST BE PROVIDED EVERY 24 HOURS.
M15183B

Fig. 1. Internal block diagram of EC/RM7830A (see Fig. 3 for detailed wiring instructions).

3 66-1092—2
EC7830, RM7830A,EC7850A,RM7850A 7800 SERIES RELAY MODULES

L1
HOT N
1
4 2

CONFIGURATION PLUG-IN PURGE

JUMPERS TIMER CARD

FLAME SIGNAL TEST

JACK
RUN/TEST
SWITCH F
PLUG-IN
MICROCOMPUTER
FLAME G
RESET AMPLIFIER
PUSHBUTTON SHUTTER
22
2K
3K
4K
RELAY
DRIVE 5K
CIRCUIT RELAY
6K
STATUS
7K FEEDBACK
8K AND LINE
VOLTAGE
9K INPUTS

SAFETY RELAY
STATUS 1K
CIRCUIT
LEDS
POWER SUPPLY CONTROL
ES1 POWER
18

ES3
19

ES2
17
3K2 AL
16
LOS RT
20 6 2K2 5K1
IGN
2 10
LD2 4K1
1K1 PV1
7 8
7K1
PV2
21
2K1 MV
9
6K1
FAN
5
3K1
AL
3
HIGH FIRE
OPTIONAL KEYBOARD 12
DISPLAY MODULE INDICATES FEEDBACK SENSING
8K1
DDL COMMON OF RELAY CONTACT STATUS
RS485 13 AND LINE VOLTAGE INPUTS
5 8K2 LOW FIRE
DDL 1 F G ... 22 USER TERMINALS
2 15
COMMUNICATIONS REMOTE 9K1
3 RESET 9K2 RELAY CONTACT OPEN
MODULATE
14
RELAY CONTACT CLOSED
1 120 VAC, 50/60 Hz POWER SUPPLY, RM7850A; 220-240 VAC,
50/60 Hz POWER SUPPLY, EC7850A. PROVIDE DISCONNECT RELAY COIL
MEANS AND OVERLOAD PROTECTION AS REQUIRED.
FIELD WIRING
2 TO CONNECT L1 DIRECTLY TO LOS, AT LEAST ONE CONTROLLED INTERNAL WIRING M15184B
SHUTDOWN MUST BE PROVIDED EVERY 24 HOURS.

Fig. 2. Internal block diagram of EC/RM7850A (see Fig. 4 for detailed wiring instructions).

66-1092—2 4
 EC7830, RM7830A,EC7850A,RM7850A 7800 SERIES RELAY MODULES

Q7800 LEGEND
AL ALARM
G 12 (NORMALLY OPEN)
N 13 ES2 PREIGNITION
INTERLOCK INPUT
AL 3 14 FAN BURNER/BLOWER
MOTOR
FAN 4 15 IGN IGNITION
L1 LINE VOLTAGE SUPPLY
5 (L1) 16
LOS LOCKOUT INPUT
RT 6 17 ES2 LD2 AIRFLOW SWITCH INPUT
MV MAIN FUEL VALVE
LD2 7 18
PV1 PILOT VALVE 1
PV1 8 19 (INTERRUPTED)

PV2 PILOT VALVE 2

MV 9 20 LOS (INTERMITTENT)

IGN 10 21 PV2 RT LIMITS AND BURNER

CONTROL
F 22 1
L1
2
N
FLAME
DETECTOR

1 12O VAC, 50/60 Hz POWER SUPPLY (RM7830A). 220-240 VAC, 50/60 Hz POWER SUPPLY
(EC7830A). PROVIDE DISCONNECT MEANS AND OVERLOAD PROTECTION AS REQUIRED.

2 SEE FLAME DETECTOR INSTRUCTIONS FOR CORRECT WIRING.

EC/RM7830A Power Burner ON/OFF, GAS or OIL Sequence

LED
DISPLAY "PREPURGE" PRE FIRST SAFETY PILOT MAIN TRIAL MAIN
INITIATE STANDBY WAITING IGNITION TIME STABIL. TIME STABIL. RUN POSTPURGE STANDBY

POWER
PILOT
FLAME

,,
MAIN
ALARM

BURNER BURNER/BLOWER MOTOR 4

IGNITION 10

PILOT VALVE 8

V2 21

MAIN VALVE 9

OPERATING
PREIGNITION INTERLOCK 17
CONTROLS
AND
INTERLOCKS LIMITS AND BURNER CONTROL CLOSED 6

LOCKOUT INPUT 20 3
1 10 sec 2
AFS CHK AIRFLOW SWITCH CHECK 7 AFS CHK

FLAME SAFE START CHECK FLAME PROVING SAFE START CHECK

SIGNAL

4 5 6 6 6
3 sec 3 or 5 sec 5 sec 3 or 5 sec 5 sec 2, 15 or 30 sec
2 sec AFS CHK
OPTIONS

1 IF ON AT CALL FOR HEAT, HOLD (120 sec). LOCK OUT IF STILL ON. 4 SELECT VIA ST7800A PURGE TIMER CARD.
2 IF OFF AFTER 10 SEC OF FAN, LOCK OUT. 5 DUE TO ONE EXTRA SECOND FOR SAFETY RELAY TEST, TIMING CAN VARY FROM 3 TO 4 SECONDS.
3 TAKE LOCKOUT ACTION, CONTINUE POSTPURGE TIMING. 6 SELECT VIA CONFIGURATION JUMPERS OR MODEL NUMBERS.
M15185B
Fig. 3. Wiring subbase and sequence chart for EC/RM7830A.

5 66-1092—2
EC7830, RM7830A,EC7850A,RM7850A 7800 SERIES RELAY MODULES

SERIES 90 LEGEND
FIRING RATE SERIES 90
CONTROLLER AL ALARM
Q7800 MOTOR (NORMALLY OPEN)
HIGH FIRE ES1 LOW FIRE SWITCH
G 12 B B INPUT
COMMON ES2 PREIGNITION
N 13 R R INTERLOCK INPUT
AL MODULATE ES3 HIGH FIRE SWITCH
3 14 W W INPUT
LOW FIRE FAN BURNER/BLOWER
4 (L1) 15 MOTOR
IGN IGNITION
FAN 5 16
L1 LINE VOLTAGE SUPPLY
RT 6 17 ES2 LOS LOCKOUT INPUT
LD2 7 18 ES1 LD2 AIRFLOW SWITCH INPUT
MV MAIN FUEL VALVE
PV1 8 19 ES3
PV1 PILOT VALVE 1
(INTERRUPTED)
MV 9 20 LOS
PV2 PILOT VALVE 2
IGN 10 21 PV2 (INTERMITTENT)
RT LIMITS AND BURNER
F 22 1 CONTROL

L1
2
N
FLAME
DETECTOR

1 120 VAC, 50/60 HZ POWER SUPPLY, RM7850A; 220-240 VAC, 50/60 HZ POWER SUPPLY, EC7850A.

2 SEE FLAME DETECTOR INSTRUCTIONS FOR CORRECT WIRING.

EC/RM7850A Power Burner Full Modulation, GAS or OIL Sequence

LED DRIVE PURGE DRIVE FIRST MAIN
DISPLAY TO HIGH OR TO LOW PRE SAFETY PILOT TRIAL MAIN
INITIATE STANDBY FIRE WAITING FIRE IGNITION TIME STABIL. TIME STABIL. RUN POSTPURGE STANDBY

POWER
PILOT
FLAME
MAIN
ALARM

,
BURNER BURNER/BLOWER MOTOR 5

IGNITION 10

PILOT VALVE 8

V2 21

MAIN VALVE 9

OPERATING 21
PREIGNITION INTERLOCK
CONTROLS
AND
INTERLOCKS LIMITS AND BURNER CONTROL CLOSED 6

LOCKOUT INPUT 20 3
1 10 sec 2
AFS CHK AIRFLOW SWITCH CHECK 7 AFS CHK

HF Sw 19 LF Switch 18

FLAME SAFE START CHECK FLAME PROVING SAFE START CHECK

SIGNAL

MOD
HF MOD
HF
LF
LF

MOTOR

4 5 6 6 6
2 sec AFS CHK 3 sec 3 or 5 sec 5 sec 3 or 5 sec 5 sec 2, 15 or 30 sec
OPTIONS

1 IF ON AT CALL FOR HEAT, HOLD (120 SEC). LOCK OUT IF STILL ON. 5 DUE TO ONE EXTRA SECOND FOR SAFETY RELAY TEST,
TIMING CAN VARY FROM 3 TO 4 SEC.
2 IF OFF AFTER 10 SEC OF FAN, LOCK OUT.
6 SELECTION VIA CONFIGURATION JUMPERS OR MODEL NUMBERS.
3 TAKE LOCKOUT ACTION. CONTINUE POSTPURGE TIMING.
M15186B
4 SELECT VIA ST7800A PURGE TIMER CARD.

Fig. 4. Wiring subbase and sequence chart for EC/RM7850A.

66-1092—2 6
 EC7830, RM7830A,EC7850A,RM7850A 7800 SERIES RELAY MODULES

Table 1. Recommended Wire Sizes and Part Numbers.

Application Recommended Wire Size Recommended Part Numbers
Line voltage terminals 14, 16, or 18 AWG copper conductor, 600 TTW60C, THW75C, THHN90C.
volt insulation, moisture-resistant wire.
KDM 22 AWG two-wire twisted pair with Belden 8723 shielded cable or
ground, or five-wire. equivalent.
Data ControlBus Module™ 22 AWG two-wire twisted pair with Belden 8723 shielded cable or
ground, or five-wire. equivalent.
Remote Reset Module 22 AWG two-wire twisted pair, insulated —
for low voltage.
Communication Interface 22 AWG two-wire twisted pair with Belden 8723 shielded cable or
ControlBus™ Module ground. equivalent.
13 Vdc full-wave rectified 18 AWG wire insulated for voltages and TTW60C, THW75C, THHN90C.
transformer power input temperatures for given application.

The KDM, Data ControlBus Module™ (for remote mounting or communications) or Communication Interface ControlBus™
Module must be wired in daisy chain configuration, 1(a)-1(a), 2(b)-2(b), 3(c)-3(c). The order of interconnection of all the devices
listed above is not important. Be aware that modules on the closest and farthest end of the daisy chain configuration string
require a 120 ohm (1/4 watt minimum) resistor termination across terminals 1 and 2 of the electrical connectors for connections
longer than 100 feet (31 meters).

Table 2. Recommended Grounding Practices.

Ground type Recommended Practice
Earth ground (subbase and 1. Use to provide a connection between the subbase and the control panel of the
relay module). equipment. Earth ground must be capable of conducting enough current to blow the
20A fuse (or breaker) in the event of an internal short circuit.
2. Use wide straps or brackets to provide minimum length, maximum surface area ground
conductors. If a leadwire must be used, use 14 AWG copper wire.
3. Make sure that mechanically tightened joints along the ground path are free of
nonconductive coatings and protected against corrosion on mating surfaces.
Signal ground (KDM, Data Use the shield of the signal wire to ground the device to the signal ground terminals 3(c) of
ControlBus™ Module, each device. Connect the shield at both ends of the daisy chain to earth ground.
Communications Interface
ControlBus™ Module).

7. Recommended wire routing of leadwires: b. Flame Detector leadwires: The maximum flame
a. Do not run high voltage ignition transformer wires sensor leadwire length is limited by the flame
in the same conduit with the flame detector, Data signal strength.
ControlBus Module™, or Remote Reset Module c. Remote Reset leadwires: The maximum length of
wiring. wire is 1000 feet (305 meters) to a Remote Reset
b. Do not route flame detector, Data ControlBus pushbutton.
Module™, or Remote Reset Module leadwires in d. Data ControlBus Module™: The maximum Data
conduit with line voltage circuits. ControlBus Module™ cable length depends on
c. Enclose flame detector leadwires without armor the number of system modules connected, the
cable in metal cable or conduit. noise conditions and the cable used. The
d. Follow directions in flame detector, Data maximum length of all Data ControlBus Module™
ControlBus Module™, or Remote Reset Module interconnecting wire is 4000 feet (1219 meters).
Instructions. 10. Be sure loads do not exceed the terminal ratings. Refer
8. The KDM is powered from a low voltage, energy limited to the label on the relay module or to the terminal
source. Mount the KDM outside of a control panel when ratings in Tables 3A, 3B, 3C and 3D.
it is protected from mechanical damage.

IMPORTANT
Final Wiring Check
A 13 Vdc power supply must be used any time more
than one KDM is used. A maximum of two KDM, 1. Check the power supply circuit. The voltage and
Data ControlBus™ Modules or S7810B Multi-Drop frequency tolerance must match those of the relay
Switch Modules are allowed in any combination. module. (A separate power supply circuit can be
required for the relay module.) Add the required
9. Maximum wire lengths: disconnect means and overload protection.
a. EC/RM7830A and EC/RM7850A leadwires: The 2. Check all wiring circuits and complete the Static
maximum leadwire length is 300 feet (91 meters) Checkout in Table 4 or 5 before installing the relay
to terminal inputs (Control, Running/Lockout module on the subbase.
Interlock). 3. Install the relay module.
4. Restore power to the panel.
7 66-1092—2
EC7830, RM7830A,EC7850A,RM7850A 7800 SERIES RELAY MODULES

Table 3A. RM7830A Terminal Ratings.

Terminal No. Abbreviation Description Ratings
G  Flame Sensor Ground a 
Earth G  Earth Ground a 
N  Line Voltage Common 
(Neutral)
3 AL Alarm (Normally Open) 120 Vac, 1A pilot duty, 10A inrush for 5000 cycles.
4 FAN Burner/Blower Motor 120 Vac, 4A at PF = 0.5, 20A inrush. b
5 L1 Line Voltage Supply (L1) 120 Vac (+10/-15%), 50/60 Hz ( ±10%).c
6 RT Limits and Burner Control 120 Vac, 1 mA.
7 LD2 Airflow Switch Input 120 Vac, 5A.
8 PV1 Pilot Valve 1 (Interrupted) 120 Vac, 4A at PF = 0.5, 20A inrush. d
9 MV Main Fuel Valve 120 Vac, 4A at PF = 0.5, 20A inrush. d
10 IGN Ignition 120 Vac, 2A at PF = 0.2.d
F(11)  Flame Signal 60 to 220 Vac, current limited.
16  Control Voltage 120 Vac (+10/-15%)
17 ES2 Preignition Interlock Input 120 Vac, 1A, 10A inrush for 5000 cycles.
Carry 5A for 250,000 cycles.
20 LOS Lockout Input 120 Vac, 1 mA.
21 PV2 Pilot Valve 2 (Intermittent) 120 Vac, 4A at PF = 0.5, 20A inrush. d
22 SHTR Shutter Shutter drive for dynamic self-check flame sensor.
a See Table 2.
b Honeywell has tested this output at 9.8A at PF = 0.5, 58.8A inrush for 100,000 cycles (EN298 approval does not require this
test).
c 2000 VA maximum connected load to relay module.
d Total load current excluding Burner/Boiler Motor and Firing Rate Outputs cannot exceed 5A, 25A inrush.

Table 3B. EC7830A Terminal Ratings.

Terminal No. Abbreviation Description Ratings
G  Flame Sensor Ground a 
Earth G  Earth Ground a 
N  Line Voltage Common(Neutral) 
3 AL Alarm(Normally Open) 220/230/240 Vac, 1A, 10 A inrush for 5000 cycles.
4 FAN Burner/Blower Motor 220/230/240 Vac, 4A at PF = 0.5, 20A inrush.
5 L1 Line Voltage Supply (L1) 220 to 240 Vac (+10/-15%), 50/60 Hz (±10%). b
6 RT Limits and Burner Control 220/230/240 Vac, 1 mA maximum.
7 LD2 Airflow Switch Input 220/230/240 Vac, 5A.
8 PV1 Pilot Valve 1 (Interrupted) 220/230/240 Vac, 4A at PF = 0.5, 20A inrush. c
9 MV Main Fuel Valve 220/230/240 Vac, 4A at PF = 0.5, 20A inrush. c
10 IGN Ignition 220/230/240 Vac, 2A ignition.c
F(11)  Flame Signal 60 to 220 Vac, current limited.
16  Control Voltage 220/230/240 Vac, 1A, 10A inrush for 5000 cycles;
carry 5A for 250,000 cycles.
17 ES2 Preignition Interlock Input 220/230/240 Vac, 1 mA.
20 LOS Lockout Input 220/230/240 Vac, 1 mA.
21 PV2 Pilot Valve 2 (Intermittent) 220/230/240 Vac, 4A at PF = 0.5, 20A inrush. c
22 SHTR Shutter Shutter drive for dynamic self-check flame sensor.d
a See Table 2.
b 2000 VA maximum connected load to relay module.
c Total load current excluding Burner/Boiler Motor and Firing Rate Outputs cannot exceed 5A, 25A inrush for 250,000 cycles.
d 220/240 Vac to 120 Vac, 10 VA stepdown transformer (not provided) must be used to drive the shutter.

66-1092—2 8
 EC7830, RM7830A,EC7850A,RM7850A 7800 SERIES RELAY MODULES

Table 3C. RM7850A Terminal Ratings.

Terminal No. Abbreviation Description Ratings
G  Flame Sensor Ground a 
Earth G  Earth Ground a 
N  Line Voltage Common(Neutral) 
3 AL Alarm (Normally Open) 120 Vac, 1A, 10A inrush for 5000 cycles.
4 L1 Line Voltage Supply (L1) 120 Vac, (+10/-15%), 50/60 Hz (±10%). b
5 FAN Burner/Blower Motor 120 Vac, 4A at PF = 0.5, 20A inrush. c
6 RT Limits and Burner Control 120 Vac, 1 mA.
7 LD2 Airflow Switch Input 120 Vac, 5A.
8 PV1 Pilot Valve 1 (Interrupted) 120 Vac, 4A at PF = 0.5, 20A inrush. d
9 MV Main Fuel Valve 120 Vac, 4A at PF = 0.5, 20A inrush. d
10 IGN Ignition 120 Vac, 2A ignition.d
F(11)  Flame Signal 60 to 220 Vac, current limited.
12 HI Firing Rate High Fire 120 Vac, 0.5A at PF = 0.5.e
13 COM Firing Rate Common 120 Vac, 0.5A at PF = 0.5.e
14 MOD Firing Rate Modulate 120 Vac, 0.5A at PF = 0.5.e
15 LO Firing Rate Low Fire 120 Vac, 0.5A at PF = 0.5.e
16  Alarm (normally closed) 120 Vac, 1A, 10A inrush for 5000 cycles; carry 5A for
250,000 cycles.
17 ES2 Preignition Interlock Input 120 Vac, 1 mA.
18 ES1 Low Fire Switch Input 120 Vac, 1 mA.
19 ES3 High Fire Switch Input 120 Vac, 1 mA.
20 LOS Lockout Input 120 Vac, 1 mA.
21 PV2 Pilot Valve 2 (Intermittent) 120 Vac, 4A at PF = 0.5, 20A inrush. s
22 SHTR Shutter Shutter drive for dynamic self-check flame sensor.
a See Table 2.
b 2000 VA maximum connected load to relay module.
c Honeywell has tested this output at 9.8A at PF = 0.5, 58.8A inrush for 100,000 cycles
(EN298 approval does not require this test).
d Total load current, excluding Burner/Boiler Motor and Firing Rate Outputs cannot exceed 5A, 25A inrush.
e Can also be 24 Vac, 3A at PF = 0.5.

9 66-1092—2
EC7830, RM7830A,EC7850A,RM7850A 7800 SERIES RELAY MODULES

Table 3D. EC7850A Terminal Ratings.

Terminal No. Abbreviation Description Ratings
G  Flame Sensor Ground a 
Earth G  Earth Ground a 
N  Line Voltage Common(Neutral) 
3 AL Alarm (Normally Open) 220/230/240 Vac, 1A, 10A inrush for 5000 cycles.
4 L1 Line Voltage Supply (L1) 220 to 240 Vac (+10/-15%), 50/60 Hz (±10%). b
5 FAN Burner/Blower Motor 220/230/240 Vac, 4A at PF = 0.5, 20A inrush.
6 RT Limits and Burner Control 220/230/240 Vac, 1 mA.
7 LD2 Airflow Switch Input 220/230/240 Vac, 5A.
8 PV1 Pilot Valve 1 (Interrupted) 220/230/240 Vac, 4A at PF = 0.5, 20A inrush. c
9 MV Main Fuel Valve 220/230/240 Vac, 4A at PF = 0.5, 20A inrush. c
10 IGN Ignition 220/230/240 Vac, 2A at PF = 0.2. c
F(11)  Flame Signal 136 to 220 Vac, current limited.
12 HI Firing Rate High Fire 220/230/240 Vac, 0.5A at PF = 0.5.d
13 COM Firing Rate Common 220/230/240 Vac, 0.5A at PF = 0.5.d
14 MOD Firing Rate Modulate 220/230/240 Vac, 0.5A at PF = 0.5.d
15 LO Firing Rate Low Fire 220/230/240 Vac, 0.5A at PF = 0.5.d
16  Alarm (normally closed) 220/230/240 Vac, 1A, 10A inrush for 6000 cycles;
carry 5A for 250,000 cycles.
17 ES2 Preignition Interlock Input 220/230/240 Vac, 1 mA.
18 ES1 Low Fire Switch Input 220/230/240 Vac, 1 mA.
19 ES3 High Fire Switch Input 220/230/240 Vac, 1 mA.
20 LOS Lockout Input 220/230/240 Vac, 1 mA.
21 PV2 Pilot Valve 2 (Intermittent) 220/230/240 Vac, 4A at PF = 0.5, 20A inrush. c
22 SHTR Shutter Shutter drive for dynamic self-check flame sensor.e
a See Table 2.
b 2000 VA maximum connected load to relay module.
c Total load current, excluding Burner/Boiler Motor and Firing Rate Outputs cannot exceed 5A, 25A inrush for 250,000 cycles.
d Can also be 24 Vac, 3A at PF = 0.5.
e 220/240 Vac to 120 Vac, 10 VA stepdown transformer (not provided) must be used to drive the shutter.

Mounting EC/RM7830A; 4. Mount the relay module by aligning the four L shaped
corner guides and knife blade terminals with the
EC/RM7850A Relay Module bifurcated contacts on the wiring subbase and securely
tightening the two screws without deforming the plastic.
1. Mount the relay module vertically on the Q7800
Subbase, or mount horizontally with the knife blade
terminals pointing down. When mounted on the
Q7800A, the relay module must be in an electrical
STATIC CHECKOUT
enclosure.
2. When mounting in an electrical enclosure, provide After checking all wiring, perform this checkout before
adequate clearance for servicing, installation and installing the relay module on the wiring subbase. These tests
removal of the relay module, KDM, flame amplifier, verify that the Q7800 Wiring Subbase is wired correctly and
flame amplifier signal voltage probes, electrical signal the external controllers, limits, interlocks, actuators, valves,
voltage probes and electrical connections. transformers, motors and other devices are operating
a. Allow an additional 2 in. (51 mm) below the relay properly.
module for the flame amplifier mounting.
b. Allow an optional 3 in. (76 mm) minimum on both
sides of the relay module for electrical signal
WARNING
voltage probes. Fire or Explosion Hazard.
3. Make sure no subbase wiring is projecting beyond the Can cause property damage, severe injury
terminal blocks. Tuck in wiring against the back of the or death.
subbase so it does not interfere with the knife blade Close all manual fuel shutoff valves before starting
terminals or bifurcated contacts. this test to prevent an explosion.

IMPORTANT
Install the relay module with a plug-in motion rather
than a hinge action.

66-1092—2 10
 EC7830, RM7830A,EC7850A,RM7850A 7800 SERIES RELAY MODULES

Use extreme care when testing the system. Line voltage is General Instructions
present on most terminal connections when power is on.
Ensure proper selection of configuration jumpers before
starting the burner operation. 1. Perform all applicable tests listed in the Static
Checkout, Table 4 or 5, in the order listed.
2. Make sure all manual fuel shutoff valves are closed.
CAUTION 3. For each test, open the master switch and install the
jumper wire(s) between the subbase wiring terminals
Electrical Hazard.
Can cause equipment damage. listed in the Test Jumpers column.
Do not perform a dielectric test with the relay module 4. Close the master switch before observing operation.
installed. Internal surge protectors break down and 5. Read the voltage between the subbase wiring terminals
conduct a current. This can cause the relay module to listed in the Voltmeter column.
fail the dielectric test or destroy the internal lightning 6. If there is no voltage or the operation is abnormal,
and high current protection. check the circuits and external devices as described in
the last column.
1. Open the master switch before installing or removing a 7. Check all wiring for correct connections, tight terminal
jumper on the subbase. screws, correct wire, and proper wiring techniques.
2. Before continuing to the next test, be sure to remove 8. Replace all damaged or incorrectly sized wires.
test jumper(s) used in the previous test. 9. Replace faulty controllers, limits, interlocks, actuators,
3. Replace all limits and interlocks that are not operating valves, transformers, motors and other devices, as
properly. Do not bypass limits and interlocks. required.
10. Make sure normal operation is obtained for each
required test before continuing the checkout.
Equipment Recommended 11. After completing each test, be sure to open the master
switch and remove the test jumper(s).
Voltmeter (1M ohm/volt minimum sensitivity) set on the 0 to
300 Vac scale and two jumper wires, No. 14 wire, insulated,
12 in. (304.8 mm) long with insulated alligator clips at both
ends.
Table 4. EC/RM7830A Static Checkout.
If Operation is Abnormal ,
Test No. Test Jumpers Voltmeter Normal Operation Check the Items Listed Below
1 None 5-L2 Line voltage at terminal 5. 1. Master switch.
2. Power connected to the master
switch.
3. Overload protection (fuse, circuit
breaker, etc.) opened the power
line.
2 None 17-L2 Line voltage at terminal 17. Preignition interlocks.
3 5-16  Alarm (if used) turns on. Alarm.
NOTE: Disconnect horn at this time (if used).
4 5-16 2-20 Line voltage at terminal 20. Limits in Lockout Circuit.
5 5-16 2-6 Line voltage at terminal 6. 1. Recycle limits.
2. Burner control.
6 5-16 2-7 1. Fan (Burner Motor or Blower) 1. Fan circuit.
starts. a. Manual fan switch.
5-4
2. Line voltage at terminal 7. b. Fan power supply,
overload protection and
starter.
c. Fan.
2. Running Limits or Airflow Switch
(LD2 input).
NOTE: Remove jumpers and reconnect alarm (if used).
7 5-10  Ignition spark (if ignition 1. Watch for spark or listen for buzz.
transformer is connected to a. Ignition electrodes are clean.
terminal 10). b. Ignition transformer is okay.
8 5-8  1. Ignition spark (if ignition 1. Watch for spark or listen for buzz.
transformer is connected to a. Ignition electrodes are clean.
terminal 8). b. Ignition transformer is okay.
2. Automatic pilot valve opens (if 2. Listen for click or feel head of
connected to terminal 8). valve for activation.
NOTE: Refer to wiring diagram of a. Actuator if used.
system being tested. b. Pilot valve.
(continued)

11 66-1092—2
EC7830, RM7830A,EC7850A,RM7850A 7800 SERIES RELAY MODULES

Table 4. EC/RM7830A Static Checkout (continued)

If Operation is Abnormal ,
Test No. Test Jumpers Voltmeter Normal Operation Check the Items Listed Below
9 5-21  Same as test no. 8 for connections Same as test no. 8. If using direct
to terminal 8. If using direct spark spark ignition, check the first stage
ignition, check the first stage fuel fuel valve(s) instead of the pilot valve.
valve(s) instead of the pilot valve.
10 5-9  Automatic main fuel valve(s) 1. Listen for and observe operation
open(s). of the main fuel valve(s) and
If using direct spark ignition on a actuator(s).
model with intermittent pilot on 2. Valve(s) and actuator(s).
terminal 21, check the optional
second stage fuel valve, if used.
Final
CAUTION
Electrical Hazard.
Can cause equipment damage.
After completing these tests, open the master switch and remove all test jumpers from the subbase
terminals. Then remove bypass jumpers from the low fuel pressure limits (if used).

Table 5. EC/RM 7850A Static Checkout.

Test Test If Operation is Abnormal,
No. Jumpers Voltmeter Normal Operation Check These Items
1 None 4-2 Line voltage at terminal 4. 1. Master switch.
2. Power connected to the master switch.
3. Overload protection (fuse, circuit breaker, etc.)
did not open the power line.
2 None 17-2 Line voltage at terminal 17. Preignition interlocks.
3 4-16  Alarm (if used) turns on. Alarm
NOTE: Disconnect horn at this time (if used).
4 4-16 2-20 Line voltage at terminal 20. Limits in Lockout Circuit
5 4-16 2-6 Line voltage at terminal 6. 1. Recycle limits.
2. Burner control.
6 4-16 2-7 1. Fan (Burner Motor or Blower) starts. 1. Fan circuit.
5-4 2. Line voltage at terminal 7. a. Manual fan switch.
b. Fan power supply, overload protection and
starter.
c. Fan.
2. Running limits of Airflow Switch (LD2 input).
NOTE: Remove jumpers and re-connect alarm (if used).
7 4-10  Ignition spark (if ignition transformer is 1. Watch for spark or listen for buzz.
connected to terminal 10). a. Ignition electrodes are clean.
b. Ignition transformer is okay.
8 4-8  1. Ignition spark (if ignition transformer is 1. Watch for spark or listen for buzz.
connected to terminal 8). a. Ignition electrodes are clean.
2. Automatic pilot valve opens (if connected b. Ignition transformer is okay.
to terminal 8). 2. Listen for click or feel head of valve for
activation.
NOTE: Refer to wiring diagram of system a. Actuator if used.
being tested. b. Pilot valve.
9 4-21  Same as test no. 4 for connections to terminal Same as test no. 4. If using direct spark ignition,
8. If using direct spark ignition, check the first check the first stage fuel valve(s) instead of the
stage fuel valve(s) instead of the pilot valve. pilot valve.
10 4-9  Automatic main fuel valve(s) opens. 1. Listen for and observe operation of the main
If using direct spark ignition on a model fuel valve(s) and actuator(s).
with intermittent pilot on terminal 21, check the 2. Valve(s) and actuator(s).
optional second stage fuel valve, if used.
11 12-13 18-L2 Voltmeter reads line voltage, then zero volts on 1. Low Fire Start Switch.
terminal 18 after motor starts driving open. 2. Firing rate motor and transformer.
12 12-13 19-L2 Firing rate motor drives open; line voltage at 1. High Fire Purge Switch.
terminal 19 after motor is in High Fire position. 2. Firing rate motor and transformer.
(continued)

66-1092—2 12
 EC7830, RM7830A,EC7850A,RM7850A 7800 SERIES RELAY MODULES

Table 5. EC/RM 7850A Static Checkout (continued).

Test Test If Operation is Abnormal,
No. Jumpers Voltmeter Normal Operation Check These Items
13 14-13 19-L2 Firing rate motor drives closed; zero volts at 1. Low Fire Start Switch.
terminal 19 after motor starts driving closed. 2. Firing rate motor and transformer.
14 15-13  1. Raise setpoint of Series 90 controllerfiring 1. Series 90 controller.
rate motor should drive toward open. 2. Firing rate motor and transformer.
2. Lower setpoint of Series 90 controller firing
rate motor should drive toward closed.
Final
CAUTION
Electrical Hazard.
Can cause equipment damage.
After completing these tests, open the master switch and remove all test jumpers from the subbase terminals. Also
remove bypass jumpers from the low fuel pressure limits (if used).

3. PURGE Period
WARNING a. Preignition Interlock opens anytime during purge.
Explosion hazard. b. Flame signal detected during purge.
Can cause serious injury or death. c. High Fire Switch fails to close within five minutes
Be sure all manual fuel shutoff valves are closed. after the firing rate motor is commanded to drive
to high fire position at start of purge (EC/
Mounting Other System Components (Fig. 5) RM7850A).
d. Low Fire Switch fails to close within five minutes,
after firing rate motor is commanded to drive to
Refer to the applicable specifications for mounting other low fire position at end of purge (EC/RM7850A).
system components. e. Airflow Switch Input does not close within 10
seconds.
f. If Airflow Switch is disabled, there is no jumper
PRINCIPAL TECHNICAL FEATURES between terminals 6 and 7.
g. Airflow Switch opens during PURGE.
The EC/RM7830A or EC/RM7850A Relay Module provide all h. Lockout Input opens during purge.
customary flame safeguard functions as well as significant i. Ignition/pilot valve/intermittent pilot valve terminal
advancements in safety, annunciation, and system is energized.
diagnostics. j. Main valve terminal is energized.
k. Internal system fault.
l. Purge card is removed.
Safety Shutdown (Lockout) Occurs If: m. Purge card is defective.
4. PREIGNITION
1. INITIATE Period a. Lockout Input opens during PREIGNITION.
a. Purge card is not installed or removed. b. Airflow Switch opens during PREIGNITION.
b. Purge card is defective. c. Preignition Interlock opens during PREIGNITION.
c. Configuration jumpers were changed (after 200 d. Flame signal detected during PREIGNITION.
hours of operation). e. Ignition terminal is not energized.
d. AC line power errors, see Operation. f. Pilot valve/intermittent pilot valve terminal is
e. Four minute INITIATE period is exceeded. energized.
2. STANDBY Period g. Main valve terminal is energized.
a. Flame signal is present after 40 seconds. h. Internal system fault.
b. Preignition Interlock is open an accumulative time i. Purge card is removed.
of 30 seconds. j. Purge card is defective.
c. Airflow Switch feature is enabled and the Airflow 5. SAFETY 1 PERIOD
Switch is closed for 120 seconds with Limits and a. Lockout Input opens during SAFETY 1.
Burner Control closed. b. Airflow Switch opens during SAFETY 1.
d. Ignition/pilot valve/intermittent pilot valve terminal c. Low Fire Switch opens (EC/RM7850A).
is energized. d. No flame is present at the end of SAFETY 1.
e. Main valve terminal is energized. e. Ignition terminal is not energized.
f. Internal system fault. f. Pilot valve/intermittent pilot valve terminal is not
g. Purge card is not installed or removed. energized.
h. Purge card is defective. g. Main valve terminal is energized.
i. Lockout Input opens during STANDBY. h. Internal system fault.
i. Purge card is removed.
j. Purge card is defective.

13 66-1092—2
EC7830, RM7830A,EC7850A,RM7850A 7800 SERIES RELAY MODULES

6. PILOT STAB. PERIOD restarts. If the condition is not corrected and the hold
a. Lockout Input opens during PILOT STAB. condition exists for four minutes, the relay module locks out.
b. Airflow Switch opens during PILOT STAB. Causes for hold conditions in the INITIATE sequence:
c. Low Fire Switch opens (EC/RM7850A). a. AC line dropout detection.
d. No flame is present. b. AC line noise that can prevent a sufficient reading of the
e. Ignition terminal is energized. line voltage inputs.
f. Pilot valve/intermittent pilot valve terminal is not c. Low line voltage brownouts.
energized.
g. Main valve terminal is energized. The INITIATE sequence also delays the burner motor starter
h. Internal system fault. from being energized and de-energized from an intermittent
i. Purge card is removed. AC line input or control input.
j. Purge card is defective.
7. MAIN TRIAL PERIOD Standby
a. Lockout Input opens during MAIN TRIAL.
b. Airflow Switch opens during MAIN TRIAL. The relay module is ready to start an operating sequence
c. Low Fire Switch opens (EC/RM7850A). when the operating control input determines a call for heat is
d. No flame is present. present. The burner switch, limits, operating limit control and
e. Ignition terminal is energized. all microcomputer-monitored circuits must be in the correct
f. Pilot valve/intermittent pilot valve terminal is not state for the relay module to continue into the PURGE
energized. sequence.
g. Pilot valve is energized during MAIN TRIAL
stabilization.
h. Main valve terminal is not energized. Normal Start-Up Purge
i. Internal system fault.
j. Purge card is removed. The relay module provides PURGE timing selectable from two
k. Purge card is defective. seconds to thirty minutes with power applied and the
8. RUN Period. operating control indicating a call for heat.
a. No flame is present. 1. The Preignition Interlocks, Limits and Burner Control,
b. Lockout Input opens. Run/Test Switch, Airflow Switch Input, Lockout Input,
c. Ignition/interrupted pilot valve terminal is and all microcomputer-monitored circuits must also be
energized. in the correct operating state.
d. Main valve terminal is not energized. 2. The blower motor output, terminal 5, is powered to start
e. Internal system fault. the PURGE sequence. The firing rate motor is driven to
f. Purge card is removed. the high fire position (EC/RM7850A). The PURGE
g. Purge card is defective. timing does not begin until the Airflow Switch Input and
h. Airflow Switch Input opens. High Fire Switch (EC/RM7850A) are both closed.
9. POSTPURGE Period 3. The Preignition Interlock Input must remain closed
a. Ignition/pilot valve/intermittent pilot valve terminal throughout PURGE or a safety shutdown occurs.
is energized. 4. The Airflow Switch Input must close by ten seconds into
b. Main valve terminal is energized. PURGE or a safety shutdown occurs.
c. Internal system fault. 5. After the firing rate motor reaches the PURGE rate
d. Purge card is removed. position and PURGE timing is completed, the motor
e. Purge card is defective. drives to the low fire position (EC/RM7850A).

Ignition Trials
OPERATION 1. Preignition: With the firing rate motor at the low fire
position (EC/RM7850A), the ignition transformer,
Sequence of Operation terminal 10, is energized for three seconds.
2. First Safety Time (SAFETY1):
The relay modules have the operating sequences listed a. With the firing rate motor at the low fire position
below; see Fig. 3 and 4. The relay module LED provide (EC/RM7850A):
positive visual indication of the program sequence: POWER, (1) The pilot valves and ignition transformer,
PILOT, FLAME, MAIN and ALARM. terminals 8, 10 and 21, are energized.
Terminal 8 is an interrupted pilot valve and
terminal 21 is an intermittent pilot valve.
Initiate (2) During SAFETY1, the Low Fire Switch Input
must be closed. If it opens, a safety
The relay module enters the INITIATE sequence when the shutdown occurs (EC/RM7850A).
relay module is initially powered. The relay module can also (3) The Preignition Interlock Input is ignored
enter the INITIATE sequence if the relay module verifies during SAFETY1, PILOT STAB., MAIN
voltage fluctuations of +10/-15% or frequency fluctuations of TRIAL, RUN and POSTPURGE.
±10% during any part of the operating sequence. The b. Flame must be proven by the end of three or five
INITIATE sequence lasts for two seconds unless the voltage seconds to allow the sequence to continue. A
or frequency tolerances are not met. When not met, a hold safety shutdown occurs if there is no flame.
condition is initiated and displayed on the optional KDM for at 3. Pilot stabilization (PILOT STAB.): With flame proven, the
least five seconds; when met, the INITIATE sequence ignition, terminal 10, is de-energized. The duration of
this state is five seconds.

66-1092—2 14
 EC7830, RM7830A,EC7850A,RM7850A 7800 SERIES RELAY MODULES

WIRING
SUBBASE

RUN/TEST
SWITCH HONEYWELL

RELAY
MODULE

CONFIGURATION
JUMPERS

PURGE
TIMER

SEQUENCE
STATUS
LED PANEL

RESET
BUTTON

CAPTIVE
MOUNTING
DUST SCREW
COVER

BURNER CONTRO
L FLAME
AMPLIFIER

M15187A

Fig. 5. EC/RM7830A and EC/RM7850A Relay Modules exploded view.

4. Main Trial (MAIN TRIAL): Postpurge

a. The MAIN TRIAL time is selectable as three or
five seconds. After PILOT STAB., and with the The relay module (model specific) provides a two-, 15- or 30-
presence of a flame, the main fuel valve, terminal second POSTPURGE following the completion of the RUN
9, is powered. If a flameout occurs, the relay period. The blower motor output is powered to drive all
module locks out within one or two seconds, combustion products and any unburned fuel from the
depending on the amplifier Flame Failure combustion chamber. It also supplies combustion air to burn
Response Time (FFRT). Thus, the second safety fuel being purged from the fuel line downstream from the fuel
time is defined as MAIN TRIAL time plus the shutoff valve.
amplifier FFRT. 1. The main fuel valve and the intermittent pilot valve,
b. During MAIN TRIAL, the Low Fire Switch Input terminals 9 and 21, are de-energized and the firing rate
must be closed (EC/RM7850A). If it opens, a motor is commanded to the low fire position
safety shutdown occurs. (EC/RM7850A) to begin the POSTPURGE period.
c. After three or five seconds of MAIN TRIAL, 2. The Preignition Interlock Input is ignored during
terminal 8 is de-energized for main stabilization. POSTPURGE.
Flame must remain proven during this five- 3. After the POSTPURGE period is completed, the relay
second period. module re-enters STANDBY.

Run Run/Test Switch

1. The firing rate motor releases to modulation.
2. The relay module is now in RUN and remains in RUN The Run/Test Switch is located on the top side of the relay
until the controller input, terminal 6, opens, indicating module, see Fig. 5. The Run/Test Switch allows the burner
that the demand is satisfied or a limit has opened. sequence to be altered as follows:
1. In Purge Drive to High Fire position, the Run/Test
Switch, when placed in the TEST position, holds in
PURGE with the firing rate motor in the High Fire
position (EC/RM7850A).

15 66-1092—2
EC7830, RM7830A,EC7850A,RM7850A 7800 SERIES RELAY MODULES

2. In the measured PURGE sequence, the Run/Test SERVICE NOTE: Clipping and removing a site-configurable
Switch, placed in the TEST position, causes the jumper enhances the level of safety.
PURGE timing to stop. The firing rate motor is in the
RUN/TEST SWITCH SELECTABLE CONFIGURATION
High Fire position. JUMPERS
3. In Purge Drive to Low Fire position, the Run/Test
Switch, when placed in the TEST position, holds the
burner in PURGE with the firing rate motor in the Low
Fire position (EC/RM7850A).
4. During the PILOT STAB. period, the Run/Test Switch,
when placed in the TEST position, stops the timer,
allowing for pilot turn-down test and other burner
adjustments. This activates a 15-second flameout timer
that permits pilot flame adjustment without nuisance
safety shutdowns.
5. During Run, the Run/Test Switch, when placed in the
TEST position, drives the firing rate motor to the Low
Fire position.

IMPORTANT
When the relay module is switched to the TEST
mode, it stops and holds at the next Run/Test Switch M7701B

point in the operating sequence. Make sure that the

Run/Test Switch is in the RUN position before Fig. 6. Selectable site-configurable jumpers.
leaving the installation.
Table 6. Site-configurable jumper options.

SETTINGS AND ADJUSTMENTS Jumper

Number Description Intact Clipped
Selectable Site-Configurable Jumpers JR1 First Safety Time 5 seconds 3 seconds
JR2 Main Trial Time 5 seconds 3 seconds
The relay module has three site-configurable jumper options,
see Fig. 6 and Table 6. If necessary, clip the site-configurable JR3 Airflow Switch No Yes
jumpers with side cutters and remove the resistors from the
relay module. The relay module reads the settings of these SERVICE NOTE: Clipping and removing a site-
configuration jumpers at startup. After 200 hours of main configurable jumper enhances the level
valve operation, the relay module locks the jumper settings of safety.
into internal memory. If these jumpers are changed after the
200 hours occur, the relay module locks out. This safety IMPORTANT
function assures that the relay module cannot be modified Clipping site-configurable jumpers after 200 hours of
after it is installed in a particular location. operation results in a nonresettable Code 110,
LOCKOUT. The relay module must be replaced.
If JR3 (Airflow Switch) is intact (no Airflow Switch), then a
jumper must be installed between terminals 6 and 7. If JR3 is Flame Signal Measurement
clipped (Airflow Switch is present), the relay module locks out
if it detects a jumper between terminals 6 and 7. Measure the flame signal at the appropriate times as defined
in the applicable flame amplifier specifications.

For further checkout and troubleshooting, see form 65-0229.

66-1092—2 R. R. Rev. 8-98 16